ml_tn/tn_ACT.tsv

1	Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
2	front:intro	mw28				0	Introduction to Acts Part 1: General Introduction Outline of the Book of Acts The beginning of the church and its mission (1:1–2:41) The early church in Jerusalem (2:42–6:7) Increasing opposition and the martyrdom of Steven (6:8–7:60) The persecution of the church and Philip’s ministry (8:1–40) Paul becomes an apostle (9:1–31) The ministry of Peter and the first Gentile converts (9:32–12:24) Paul, the apostle to Gentiles, the Jewish law, and council of church leaders at Jerusalem (12:25–16:5) The expansion of the church into the middle Mediterranean area and Asia Minor (16:6–19:20) Paul travels to Jerusalem and becomes a prisoner in Rome (19:21–28:31) What is the Book of Acts about? The Book of Acts tells the story of the early church as more and more people became believers. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book began when Jesus went back to heaven and ended about thirty years later. How should the title of this book be translated? Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a title that may be clearer, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.” Who wrote the Book of Acts? This book does not give the name of the author. However, it is addressed to Theophilus, the same person to whom the Gospel of Luke is addressed. Also, in parts of the book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought Luke is the author of the Book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke. Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He saw many of the events described in the Book of Acts. Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts What is the Church? The Church is the group of people who believe in Christ. The Church includes both Jew and Gentile believers. The events in this book show God helping the Church. He empowered believers to live righteous lives through his Holy Spirit. Part 3: Important Translation Issues What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Acts? These are the most significant textual issues in Acts: The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible, but they are not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Some modern versions put the verses in square brackets ([]). The ULT and UST put them in a footnote. “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God’” (Acts 8:37). “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.” (Acts 15:34) “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.” (Acts 24:6b-8a) “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.” (Acts 28:29) In the following verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. Translators will need to choose which reading to translate. The ULT has the first readings but include the second readings in footnotes. “They returned from Jerusalem” (Acts 12:25). Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem (or to there).” “he put up with them” (Acts 13:18). Some versions read, “he cared for them.” “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” (Acts 15:17-18). Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3	1:intro	vyg9				0	Acts 01 General Notes Structure and formatting This chapter records an event, commonly known as the “Ascension,” when Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. He will not come back until he returns at his “second coming.” (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]]) The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You might want to start this book the way people start letters in your culture. Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotes from Psalms in 1:20. Special concepts in this chapter Baptize The word “baptize” has two meanings in this chapter. It refers to the water baptism of John and to the baptism of the Holy Spirit (Acts 1:5). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]]) “He spoke about the kingdom of God” Some scholars believe that when Jesus “spoke about the kingdom of God,” he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God did not come before he died. Others believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was alive and that here Jesus was explaining that it was beginning in a new form. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter The twelve disciples The following are the lists of the twelve disciples: In Matthew: Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot. In Mark: Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. In Luke: Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot. Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James. Akeldama This is a phrase in Hebrew or Aramaic. Luke used Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told what it means. You should probably spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain the meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
4	1:1	q9ep			τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην	1	The former book is the Gospel of Luke.
5	1:1	ryj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ὦ Θεόφιλε	1	Luke wrote this book to a man named Theophilus. Some translations follow their own culture’s way of addressing a letter and write “Dear Theophilus” at the beginning of the sentence. Theophilus means “friend of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6	1:2	n435		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας & ἀνελήμφθη	1	This refers to Jesus’ ascension into heaven. Alternate translation: “until the day on which God took him up to heaven” or “until the day that he ascended into heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7	1:2	a394			ἐντειλάμενος & διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	The Holy Spirit led Jesus to instruct his apostles on certain things.
8	1:3	dup3			μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν	1	This refers to Jesus’ suffering and death on the cross.
9	1:3	yc16			οἷς & παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα	1	Jesus appeared to his apostles and to many other disciples.
10	1:4	d3kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here the word “he” refers to Jesus. Except where otherwise noted, the word “you” in the book of Acts is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
11	1:4	lw3e				0	This event happened during the 40 days that Jesus appeared to his followers after he had risen from the dead.
12	1:4	vb7g			καὶ συναλιζόμενος	1	“When Jesus was meeting together with his apostles”
13	1:4	sg4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	This is a reference to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised to send” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14	1:4	tj6r			ἣν	1	If you translated the previous phrase to include the words “Holy Spirit,” you can change the word “which” to “whom.” Alternate translation: “about whom Jesus said”
15	1:5	uu4k			Ἰωάννης μὲν ἐβάπτισεν ὕδατι; & ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ	1	Jesus contrasts how John baptized people in water with how God would baptize believers in the Holy Spirit.
16	1:5	fnq5			Ἰωάννης μὲν ἐβάπτισεν ὕδατι	1	“John indeed baptized people with water”
17	1:5	dzj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will baptize you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
18	1:6	n9wt				0	Here the word “they” refers to the apostles.
19	1:6	f7uj			εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	“will you now make Israel a great kingdom again”
20	1:7	y1fu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς	1	Possible meanings are (1) the words “times” and “seasons” refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” or (2) the two words are basically synonymous. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
21	1:8	ld4k			λήμψεσθε δύναμιν, & καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες,	1	The apostles will receive power that will enable them to be witnesses for Jesus. Alternate translation: “God will empower you … to be my witnesses”
22	1:8	vb4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	Possible meanings are (1) “all over the world” or (2) “to the places on earth that are farthest away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
23	1:9	e1q1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βλεπόντων αὐτῶν	1	“as they watched.” The apostles “were looking up” at Jesus because Jesus rose into the sky. Alternate translation: “as they were looking up at the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24	1:9	l1cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπήρθη	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he rose up into the sky” or “God took him up into the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25	1:9	ug58			νεφέλη ὑπέλαβεν αὐτὸν ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1	“a cloud blocked their view so that they could no longer see him”
26	1:10	enu1			ἀτενίζοντες & εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	“staring at the sky” or “gazing at the sky”
27	1:11	gpg3			ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι	1	The angels address the apostles as men who are from Galilee.
28	1:11	cue7			ἐλεύσεται ὃν τρόπον	1	Jesus will return in the sky, just as clouds covered him when he arose into heaven.
29	1:12	x2nk			τότε ὑπέστρεψαν	1	“The apostles returned”
30	1:12	p19g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν	1	This refers to the distance which, according to Rabbinical tradition, a person was allowed to walk on a Sabbath day. Alternate translation: “about one kilometer away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
31	1:13	vis2			καὶ ὅτε εἰσῆλθον	1	“When they reached their destination.” Verse 12 says they were returning to Jerusalem.
32	1:13	zt12			τὸ ὑπερῷον	1	“the room on the upper level of the house”
33	1:14	z6cf			οὗτοι πάντες ἦσαν & ὁμοθυμαδὸ	1	This means that the apostles and believers there all shared a common commitment and purpose, and there was no strife among them.
34	1:14	u4pr			προσκαρτεροῦντες & τῇ προσευχῇ	1	This means that the disciples prayed together regularly and frequently.
35	1:15	cup2				0	This event happened during the time that Peter and the other believers were staying together in the upper room.
36	1:15	il8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	These words mark the beginning of a new part of the story. They refer to the period of time after Jesus ascended while the disciples were meeting in the upper chamber. Alternate translation: “During that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
37	1:15	tl5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι	1	“one hundred and twenty people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
38	1:15	liz1			ἐν μέσῳ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Here the word “brothers” refers to fellow believers and includes both men and women.
39	1:16	i8tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that we read about in scripture had to take place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
40	1:16	f3um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ	1	The word “mouth” refers to the words that David wrote. Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
41	1:17	tmv1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	In verses 18-19 the author tells the reader background information about how Judas died and what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
42	1:17	tmv2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Although Peter is addressing the entire group of people, here the word “us” refers only to the apostles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
43	1:17	q73y				0	In verse 17 Peter continues his speech to the believers that he began in Acts 1:16.
44	1:18	dd58			οὗτος & οὖν	1	The words “this man” refers to Judas Iscariot.
45	1:18	w83j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας	1	“the money that he earned from the evil thing that he did.” The words “his wickedness” refer to Judas Iscariot’s betraying Jesus to the people who killed him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
46	1:18	kg3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρηνὴς γενόμενος, ἐλάκησεν μέσος, καὶ ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ	1	This suggests that Judas fell from a high place, rather than just falling down. The fall was severe enough to cause his body to burst open. Other passages of scripture mention that he hanged himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
47	1:19	mxf3			Χωρίον Αἵματος	1	When the people living in Jerusalem heard of the way in which Judas died, they renamed the field.
48	1:20	d7pk				0	Based on the situation with Judas that Peter just recounted, he recalls two Psalms of David that relate to the incident. The quote ends at the end of this verse.
49	1:20	mz13				0	Peter continues his speech to the believers that he began in Acts 1:16.
50	1:20	ip5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται γὰρ ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “For David wrote in the Book of Psalms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
51	1:20	mc45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
52	1:20	chq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος	1	Possible meanings are (1) that the word “field” refers to the field where Judas died or (2) that the word “field” refers to Judas’s dwelling place and is a metaphor for his family line. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
53	1:20	lsm2			γενηθήτω & ἔρημος	1	“become empty”
54	1:21	xz69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “us” refers to the apostles and does not include the audience to whom Peter is speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
55	1:21	t916				0	Peter finishes his speech to the believers that he began in Acts 1:16.
56	1:21	c5k2			δεῖ οὖν	1	Based on the scriptures that he quoted and on what Judas had done, Peter tells the group what they must do.
57	1:21	zuf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς	1	Going in and out among a group of people is a metaphor for openly being part of that group. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
58	1:22	mrx7			ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν, μάρτυρα τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ σὺν ἡμῖν, γενέσθαι ἕνα τούτων	1	The qualification for the new apostle that began with the words “It is necessary … that one of the men who accompanied us” in verse 21 ends here. The subject of the verb “must be” is thus “one of the men.” Here is a reduced form of the sentence: “It is necessary … that one of the men who accompanied us … beginning from the baptism of John … must be a witness with us.”
59	1:22	qb8j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου	1	The noun “baptism” can be translated as a verb. Possible meanings: (1) “beginning from when John baptized Jesus” or (2) “beginning from when John baptized people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
60	1:22	yi3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “until the day when Jesus left us and rose up to heaven” or “until the day that God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
61	1:22	g3n9			μάρτυρα τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ σὺν ἡμῖν, γενέσθαι	1	“must begin to testify with us about his resurrection”
62	1:23	lz7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔστησαν δύο	1	Here the word “They” refers to all of the believers who were present. Alternate translation: “They proposed two men who fulfilled the requirements that Peter listed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
63	1:23	s1ff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Ἰωσὴφ τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος	1	This can be translated with an active form. Alternate translation: “Joseph, whom people also called Barsabbas and Justus” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
64	1:24	zd1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν	1	Here the word “They” refers to all of the believers, but it was probably one of the apostles who spoke these words. Alternate translation: “The believers prayed together and one of the apostles said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
65	1:24	se6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων	1	Here the word “hearts” refers to the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, know the thoughts and motives of everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
66	1:25	mg47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	λαβεῖν τὸν τόπον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς	1	Here the word “apostleship” defines what kind of “ministry” this is. Alternate translation: “to take Judas’ place in this apostolic ministry” or “to take Judas’ place in serving as an apostle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
67	1:25	ryv6			ἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας	1	Here the expression “turned away” means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling”
68	1:25	tx6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τὸν ἴδιον	1	This phrase refers to Judas’ death and likely to his judgment after death. Alternate translation: “to go where he belongs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
69	1:26	r84c			ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς	1	The apostles cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias.
70	1:26	w4ph			ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν	1	The lot indicated that Matthias was the one to replace Judas.
71	1:26	fk4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνκατεψηφίσθη μετὰ τῶν ἕνδεκα ἀποστόλων	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers considered him to be an apostle with the other eleven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
72	2:intro	x8fr				1	Acts 02 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17-21, 25-28, and 34-35. Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 2:31. The events described in this chapter are commonly called “Pentecost.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers in this chapter. Special concepts in this chapter Tongues The word “tongues” has two meanings in this chapter. Luke describes what came down from heaven (Acts 2:3) as tongues that looked like fire. This is different from “a tongue of flame,” which is a fire that looks like a tongue. Luke also uses the word “tongues” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them (Acts 2:4). Last days No one knows for sure when the “last days” (Acts 2:17) began. Your translation should not say more than the ULT does about this. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]]) Baptize The word “baptize” in this chapter refers to Christian baptism (Acts 2:38-41). Though the event described in Acts 2:1-11 is the baptism of the Holy Spirit that Jesus promised in Acts 1:5, the word “baptize” here does not refer to that event. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]]) The prophecy of Joel Many of the things that Joel said would happen did happen on the day of Pentecost (Acts 2:17-18), but some things Joel spoke of did not happen (Acts 2:19-20). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]]) Wonders and signs These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus is who the disciples said he is.
73	2:1	i4sa				0	This is a new event; it is now the Day of Pentecost, 50 days after Passover.
74	2:1	i4sb				0	Here the word “they” refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers that Luke mentions in Acts 1:15.
75	2:2	jc1w			ἄφνω	1	This word refers to an event that happens unexpectedly.
76	2:2	qjc3			ἐγένετο & ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἦχος	1	Possible meanings are (1) “heaven” refers to the place where God lives. Alternate translation: “a sound came from heaven” or (2) “heaven” refers to the sky. Alternate translation: “a sound came from the sky”
77	2:2	jec5			ἦχος, ὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας	1	“a noise that sounded like a very strong wind blowing”
78	2:2	t4y4			ὅλον τὸν οἶκον	1	This may have been a house or a larger building.
79	2:3	re3t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὤφθησαν αὐτοῖς & γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός	1	These might not be actual tongues or fire, but something that looked like them. Possible meanings are (1) tongues that looked like they were made of fire or (2) small flames of fire that looked like tongues. When fire burns in a small space, such as on a lamp, the flame can be shaped like a tongue. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
80	2:3	xtk4			διαμεριζόμεναι & καὶ ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν	1	This means that the “tongues like fire” spread out so that there was one on each person.
81	2:4	v7hi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, καὶ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit filled all of those who were there and they” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
82	2:4	nr9f			λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις	1	They were speaking in languages that they did not already know.
83	2:5	dz1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Here the word “them” refers to the believers; the word “his” refers to each person in the multitude. Verse 5 gives background information about the large number of Jews who were living in Jerusalem, many of whom were present during this event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
84	2:5	yft2			ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς	1	Here “godly men” refers to people who were devout in their worship of God and tried to obey all of the Jewish laws.
85	2:5	stq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	παντὸς ἔθνους τῶν ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν	1	“every nation in the world.” The word “every” is an exaggeration that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
86	2:6	bpj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γενομένης δὲ τῆς φωνῆς ταύτης	1	This refers to the sound that was similar to a strong wind. Alternate translation: “When they heard this sound” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
87	2:6	u9hc			τὸ πλῆθος	1	“the large crowd of people”
88	2:7	m8kd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο δὲ πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	These two words share similar meanings. Together they emphasize the intensity of amazement. Alternate translation: “They were greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
89	2:7	wnk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχ ἰδοὺ, ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι	1	The people ask this question to express their amazement. The question could be changed to an exclamation. Alternate translation: “All of these Galileans could not possibly know our languages!” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
90	2:8	hzm8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	καὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν	1	Possible meanings are (1) this is a rhetorical question that expresses how amazed they were or (2) this is a real question for which the people wanted an answer. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
91	2:8	wb5t			τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν	1	“in our own languages that we have learned from birth”
92	2:9	f1ve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πάρθοι, & Μῆδοι, & Ἐλαμεῖται	1	These are names of people groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
93	2:9	dm23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν; & Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον, & Ἀσίαν;	1	These are names of large areas of land. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
94	2:10	tmb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φρυγίαν, & Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον, & Λιβύης & Κυρήνην	1	These are names of large areas of land. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
95	2:11	jnp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κρῆτες & Ἄραβες	1	These are names of people groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
96	2:11	w8jy			προσήλυτοι	1	converts to the Jewish religion
97	2:12	el2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο & καὶ διηποροῦντο	1	These two words share similar meanings. Together they emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “surprised and confused” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
98	2:13	fg59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν	1	Some people accuse the believers of having drunk too much wine. Alternate translation: “They are drunk” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
99	2:13	jj1n			γλεύκους	1	This refers to wine that is in the process of fermentation.
100	2:14	k5hr				0	Peter begins his speech to the Jews who were there on the Day of Pentecost.
101	2:14	c919			σταθεὶς & σὺν τοῖς ἕνδεκα	1	All the apostles stood up in support of Peter’s statement.
102	2:14	d9tb			ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ	1	This is an idiom for “spoke loudly.” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
103	2:14	ei5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω	1	This means that Peter is about to explain the meaning of what the people had witnessed. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “know this” or “let me explain this to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
104	2:14	qp16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου	1	Peter was referring to what he was saying. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
105	2:15	h28q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γὰρ & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	“It is only nine o’clock in the morning.” Peter expected his audience to know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
106	2:16	ktw9				0	Here Peter tells them a passage about which the prophet Joel wrote in the Old Testament that relates to what is happening with the languages in which the believers spoke. This is written in the form of poetry as well as being a quotation.
107	2:16	f9hz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “this is what God told the prophet Joel to write” or “this is that which the prophet Joel spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
108	2:17	ijl8			ἔσται	1	“This is what will happen” or “This is what I will do”
109	2:17	u2d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	Here the words “pour out” mean to give generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will give my Spirit abundantly to all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
110	2:18	uwd7				0	Peter continues to quote the prophet Joel.
111	2:18	nd34			τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας	1	“both my male and my female servants.” These words emphasize that God will pour out his Spirit on all of his servants, both men and women.
112	2:18	wz2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου	1	Here the words “pour out” mean to give generously and abundantly. See how you translated this in Acts 2:17. Alternate translation: “I will give my Spirit abundantly to all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
113	2:19	p5zi			ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ	1	“thick smoke” or “clouds of smoke”
114	2:20	ylv7				0	Peter finishes quoting the prophet Joel.
115	2:20	a6yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	This means that the sun will appear to be dark instead of light. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
116	2:20	f34k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	This means that the moon will appear to be red like blood. Alternate translation: “the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
117	2:20	swb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἡμέραν & τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ	1	The words “great” and “remarkable” share similar meanings and emphasize the intensity of greatness. Alternate translation: “the very great day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
118	2:20	lc4g			ἐπιφανῆ	1	great and beautiful
119	2:21	vql5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on him” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
120	2:22	sa78				0	Peter continues his speech to the Jews that he began in Acts 1:16.
121	2:22	g6vj			ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	“listen to what I am about to say”
122	2:22	f2t1			ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις	1	This means that God proved that he had appointed Jesus for his mission, and proved who he was by his many miracles.
123	2:23	s38b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The nouns “plan” and “foreknowledge” can be translated as verbs. This means that God planned out and knew beforehand what would happen to Jesus. Alternate translation: “because God planned out and knew beforehand everything that would happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
124	2:23	i6un		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦτον & ἔκδοτον	1	Possible meanings: (1) “you handed Jesus over into the hands of his enemies” or (2) “Judas betrayed Jesus to you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
125	2:23	f5kn			διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων, προσπήξαντες ἀνείλατε	1	Although “lawless men” actually crucified Jesus, Peter accuses the crowd of having killed him because they demanded his death.
126	2:23	e38a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων	1	Here “hand” refers to the actions of the lawless men. Alternate translation: “through the actions of lawless men” or “by what lawless men did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
127	2:23	f6kd			ἀνόμων	1	Possible meanings are (1) the unbelieving Jews who accused Jesus of crimes or (2) the Roman soldiers who performed the execution of Jesus.
128	2:24	ei37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν	1	Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “But God caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
129	2:24	s8j3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου	1	Peter speaks of dying as if death were a person who ties people up with painful ropes and holds them captive. He speaks of God ending Christ’s death as if God broke the ropes that held Chist and set Christ free. Alternate translation: “ending the pains of death” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
130	2:24	ykq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
131	2:24	vuf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Peter speaks of Christ remaining dead as if death were a person who held him captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
132	2:25	dd5a				0	Here Peter quotes a passage that David wrote in a Psalm which relates to Jesus’ crucifixion and resurrection. Since Peter says that David said these words about Jesus, the words “I” and “my” refer to Jesus and the words “Lord” and “he” refer to God.
133	2:25	n2ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐνώπιόν μου	1	“in front of me.” Alternate translation: “in my presence” or “with me” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
134	2:25	l6xp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐκ δεξιῶν μού	1	To be at someone’s “right hand” often means to be in a position to help and sustain. Alternate translation: “right beside me” or “with me to help me” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
135	2:25	s4yp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	Here the word “moved” means to be troubled. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “people will not be able to cause me trouble” or “nothing will trouble me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
136	2:26	z8vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου	1	People consider the “heart” the center of emotions and the “tongue” voices those emotions. Alternate translation: “I was glad and rejoiced” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
137	2:26	zz6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	Possible meanings of the word “flesh” are (1) he is a mortal who will die. Alternate translation: “Even though I am only mortal, I will have confidence in God” or (2) it is synecdoche for his entire person. Alternate translation: “I will live with confidence in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
138	2:27	whi3				0	Since Peter says that David said these words about Jesus, the words “my,” “Holy One,” and “me” refer to Jesus and the words “you” and “your” refer to God.
139	2:27	m3ij				0	Peter finishes quoting David.
140	2:27	rld3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	The Messiah, Jesus, refers to himself with the words “your Holy One.” Alternate translation: “neither will you allow me, your Holy One, to see decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
141	2:27	l5cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	Here the word “see” means to experience something. The word “decay” refers to the decomposition of his body after death. Alternate translation: “to decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
142	2:28	gsk6			ὁδοὺς ζωῆς	1	“the ways that lead to life”
143	2:28	y7gf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	Here the word “face” refers to the presence of God. Alternate translation: “very glad when I see you” or “very glad when I am in your presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
144	2:28	ej5m			εὐφροσύνης	1	joy, happiness
145	2:29	wh97				0	In verses 29 & 30, the words he,” “his,” and “him” refer to David. In verse 31, the first “He” refers to David and the words within the quote “He” and “his” refer to Christ.
146	2:29	pv1x				0	Peter continues his speech that he began in Acts 1:16 to the Jews that surround him and the other believers in Jerusalem.
147	2:29	ps7c			ἀδελφοί, ἐξὸν	1	“My fellow Jews, I”
148	2:29	vtc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐτελεύτησεν καὶ ἐτάφη	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he died and people buried him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
149	2:30	hq71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ	1	“God would set one of David’s descendants upon David’s throne.” Alternate translation: “God would appoint one of David’s descendants to be king in David’s place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
150	2:30	x11q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ	1	Here the word “fruit” refers to what “his body” produces. Alternate translation: “one of his descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
151	2:31	tn4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God did not abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
152	2:31	up5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	Here the word “see” means to experience something. The word “decay” refers to the decomposition of his body after death. See how you translated this in Acts 2:27. Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh decay” or “nor did he remain dead long enough for his flesh to decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
153	2:32	kw6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here, the second word “this” refers to the disciples’ speaking in other languages when they received the Holy Spirit. The word “we” refers to the disciples and those that witnessed the risen Jesus after his death. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
154	2:32	udn1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός	1	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “God caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
155	2:33	kij2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because God has exalted Jesus up to his right hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
156	2:33	c9mr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς	1	“Right hand of God” here is an idiom that means that Christ will rule as God, with God’s authority. Alternate translation: “Christ is in the position of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
157	2:33	c1dr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐξέχεεν & ὃ	1	Here the words “poured out” mean that Jesus, who is God, made these events to happen. It is implicit that he does this by giving the Holy Spirit to the believers. Alternate translation: “he has caused to happen these things that” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
158	2:33	wsg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐξέχεεν	1	Here the words “pour out” mean to give generously and abundantly. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 2:17. Alternate translation: “given abundantly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
159	2:34	i8wu				0	Peter again quotes one of David’s Psalms. David is not speaking of himself in this Psalm. “The Lord” and “my” refer to God; “my Lord” and “your” refer to Jesus the Messiah.
160	2:34	m7fy				0	Peter finishes his speech to the Jews that he began in Acts 1:16.
161	2:34	kvn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	To sit at the “right hand of God” is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
162	2:35	nf1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	This means that God will completely defeat the Messiah’s enemies and make them subject to him. Alternate translation: “until I make you victorious over all of your enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
163	2:36	pnp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ	1	This refers to the entire nation of Israel. Alternate translation: “every Israelite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
164	2:37	xan1				0	Here the word “they” refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke.
165	2:37	w1ma				0	The Jews respond to Peter’s speech and Peter answers them.
166	2:37	zls6			ἀκούσαντες	1	“when the people heard what Peter had said”
167	2:37	s85q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Peter’s words pierced their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
168	2:37	l15x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	This means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “deeply troubled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
169	2:38	cmb7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βαπτισθήτω	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
170	2:38	geb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	“In the name of” here is a metonym for “by the authority of” Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
171	2:39	v8vi			πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν	1	This means either (1) “all people who live far away” or (2) “all people who are far from God.”
172	2:40	k1kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	This is the end of the part of the story that happened on the Day of Pentecost. Verse 42 begins a section that explains how the believers continued to live after the Day of Pentecost. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
173	2:40	v6ip		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς	1	“he seriously told them and begged them.” Here the words “testified” and “urged” share similar meanings and emphasize that Peter urged them strongly to respond to what he was saying. Alternate translation: “he strongly urged them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
174	2:40	wtd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σώθητε ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης	1	The implication is that God will punish “this wicked generation.” Alternate translation: “Save yourselves from the punishment that these wicked people will suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
175	2:41	r9qz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οἱ & ν ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	Here the word “received” means that they accepted what Peter said to be true. Alternate translation: “they believed what Peter said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
176	2:41	kz64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “people baptized them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
177	2:41	a47f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσετέθησαν ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ, ψυχαὶ ὡσεὶ τρισχίλιαι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “about three thousand souls joined the believers on that day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
178	2:41	sv5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ψυχαὶ ὡσεὶ τρισχίλιαι	1	Here the word “souls” refers to people. Alternate translation: “about 3,000 people” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
179	2:42	gc59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου	1	Bread was part of their meals. Possible meanings are (1) this refers to any meals they might eat together. Alternate translation: “eating meals together” or (2) this refers to the meals they would eat together in order to remember Christ’s death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “eating the Lord’s Supper together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
180	2:43	gi9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐγίνετο δὲ πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	Here the word “Fear” refers to deep respect and awe for God. The word “soul” refers to the entire person. Alternate translation: “Each person felt a deep respect and awe for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
181	2:43	ys3y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πολλά τε τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο	1	Possible meanings are (1) “the apostles performed many wonders and signs” or (2) “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
182	2:43	q6dm			τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα	1	“miraculous deeds and supernatural events.” See how you translated this in Acts 2:22.
183	2:44	u8qk			πάντες δὲ οἱ πιστεύοντες ἦσαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	Possible meanings are (1) “All of them believed the same thing” or (2) “All who believed were together in the same place.”
184	2:44	jy2w			εἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά	1	“shared their belongings with one another”
185	2:45	h8tn			κτήματα καὶ τὰς ὑπάρξεις	1	“land and things they owned”
186	2:45	f74s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διεμέριζον αὐτὰ πᾶσιν	1	Here the word “them” refers to the profit that they made from selling their property and possessions. Alternate translation: “distributed the proceeds to all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
187	2:45	n9hi			καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν	1	They distributed the proceeds that they earned from selling their property and possessions to any believer who had a need.
188	2:46	in43			προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	Possible meanings are (1) “they continued meeting together” or (2) “they all continued to have the same attitude.”
189	2:46	q1ge		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κλῶντές & κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον	1	Bread was part of their meals. Alternate translation: “they eat meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
190	2:46	i2yk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας	1	Here “heart” is a metonym for a person’s emotions. Alternate translation: “joyfully and humbly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
191	2:47	z6ig			αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν	1	“praising God. All the people approved of them”
192	2:47	kc42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοὺς σῳζομένους	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom the Lord saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
193	3:intro	hpd9				0	Acts 03 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter The covenant God made with Abraham This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews because God was fulfilling part of the covenant he had made with Abraham. Peter thought that the Jews were the ones who were truly guilty of killing Jesus, but he Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “You delivered up” The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and told the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter thought that they were the ones who were truly guilty of killing Jesus. But he tells them that they are also the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (Luke 3:26). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
194	3:1	u6nu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Verse 2 gives background information about the lame man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
195	3:1	b5rm				0	One day Peter and John go to the temple.
196	3:1	br7i			εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	They did not go into the temple building where only the priests were allowed. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard” or “into the temple area”
197	3:2	f227		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ, τὴν λεγομένην Ὡραίαν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Every day, people carried a certain man, lame from birth, and laid him near the Beautiful gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
198	3:2	j68t			χωλὸς	1	unable to walk
199	3:4	xq4u			ἀτενίσας & Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν	1	Both Peter and John looked at the man, but only Peter spoke.
200	3:4	t1q9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀτενίσας & εἰς αὐτὸν	1	Possible meanings are (1) “looking directly at him” or (2) “looking intently at him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
201	3:5	e3c6			ὁ & ἐπεῖχεν αὐτοῖς	1	Here the word “looked” means to pay attention to something. Alternate translation: “The lame man paid close attention to them”
202	3:6	x6bm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον	1	These words refer to money. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
203	3:6	zi9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ & ἔχω	1	It is understood that Peter has the ability to heal the man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
204	3:6	t2vf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here the word “name” refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: “With the authority of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
205	3:7	ec6j			ἤγειρεν αὐτόν	1	“Peter caused him to stand”
206	3:8	abc1			ἐξαλλόμενος, ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν	1	The lame man did these actions.
207	3:8	zp7x			εἰσῆλθεν & εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	He did not go inside the temple building where only the priests were allowed. Alternate translation: “he entered … the temple area” or “he entered … into the temple courtyard”
208	3:10	zy7h			ἐπεγίνωσκον & ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ	1	“realized that it was the man” or “recognized him as the man”
209	3:10	p2zh			τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ	1	This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 3:2.
210	3:10	j6zf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως	1	Here the words “wonder” and “amazement” share similar meanings and emphasize the intensity of the people’s amazement. Alternate translation: “they were extremely amazed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
211	3:11	g4y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” makes it clear that they were not inside the temple where only the priests were allowed to enter. Here the words “us” and “we” refer to Peter and John but not to the crowd to whom Peter is talking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
212	3:11	eu1l				0	After healing the man who could not walk, Peter talks to the people.
213	3:11	rj43			τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος	1	“Solomon’s Porch.” This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof, and which people named after king Solomon.
214	3:11	rk1m			ἔκθαμβοι	1	“extremely surprised”
215	3:12	x9m9			ἰδὼν δὲ, ὁ Πέτρος	1	Here the word “this” refers to the amazement of the people.
216	3:12	ndi3			ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	“Fellow Israelites.” Peter was addressing the crowd.
217	3:12	uyg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί θαυμάζετε	1	Peter asks this question to emphasize that they should not be surprised by what had happened. Alternate translation: “you should not be surprised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
218	3:12	j6ld		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν	1	Peter asks this question to emphasize that the people should not think that he and John had healed the man by their own abilities. This could be written as two statements. Alternate translation: “Do not fix your eyes on us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
219	3:12	mwd9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἡμῖν & ἀτενίζετε	1	This means that they looked intently at them without stopping. Alternate translation: “stare at us” or “look at us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
220	3:13	q8q2				0	Peter continues his speech to the Jews that he began in Acts 3:12.
221	3:13	cp1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠρνήσασθε κατὰ πρόσωπον Πειλάτου	1	Here the phrase “before the face of” means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “rejected in Pilate’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
222	3:13	yy96			κρίναντος ἐκείνου ἀπολύειν	1	“when Pilate had decided to release Jesus”
223	3:14	s6qj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “for Pilate to release a murderer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
224	3:15	jwb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” includes just Peter and John. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
225	3:15	ljn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς	1	This refers to Jesus. Possible meanings are (1) “the one who gives people eternal life” or (2) “the ruler of life” or (3) “the founder of life” or (4) “the one who leads people to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
226	3:16	xu92			καὶ	1	This word, “Now,” shifts the audiences’ attention to the lame man.
227	3:16	abc2			ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	“by faith in the name of Jesus”
228	3:16	qt8w			ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	“the name of Jesus has made well”
229	3:16	abc3			ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ	1	“gave to the lame man”
230	3:17	v45t			καὶ νῦν	1	Here Peter shifts the audience’s attention from the lame man and continues to talk to them directly.
231	3:17	x62k			κατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε	1	Possible meanings are (1) that the people did not know that Jesus was the Messiah or (2) that the people did not understand the significance of what they were doing.
232	3:18	gcc1			ὁ & Θεὸς & προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	When the prophets spoke, it was as though God himself was speaking because he told them what to say. Alternate translation: “God foretold by telling all of the prophets what to speak”
233	3:18	ms6d			ὁ & Θεὸς & προκατήγγειλεν	1	“God spoke about ahead of time” or “God told about before they happened”
234	3:18	z3l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	Here the word “mouth” refers to the words that the prophets spoke and wrote down. Alternate translation: “the words of all the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
235	3:19	cw18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ἐπιστρέψατε	1	“and turn to the Lord.” Here “turn” is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: “and start obeying the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
236	3:19	zm6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας	1	Here “blotted out” is a metaphor for forgiving. Sins are spoken of as if they are written in a book and God erases them from the book when he forgives them. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive you for sinning against him” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
237	3:20	f2wm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here the words “presence of the Lord” is a metonym for the Lord himself. Alternate translation: “from the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
238	3:20	x3ca			καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1	“times of relief from the presence of the Lord.” Possible meanings are (1) “times when God will strengthen your spirits” or (2) “times when God will revive you”
239	3:20	h3nk			ἀποστείλῃ τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν Χριστὸν	1	“that he may again send the Christ.” This refers to Christ’s coming again.
240	3:20	yzr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν	1	This may be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
241	3:21	sj21				0	In verses 22-23 Peter quotes something Moses told before the Messiah came.
242	3:21	u33e				0	Peter continues his speech that he began in Acts 3:12 to the Jews who stood in the temple area.
243	3:21	vgn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι	1	“He is the One heaven must welcome.” Peter speaks of heaven as if it were a person who welcomes Jesus into his home. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
244	3:21	y1ps			δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι, ἄχρι	1	This means that it is necessary for Jesus to remain in heaven because that is what God has planned.
245	3:21	x2f3			ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων	1	Possible meanings are (1) “until the time when God will restore all things” or (2) “until the time when God will fulfill everything that he foretold.”
246	3:21	a2m8			ὧν ἐλάλησεν ὁ Θεὸς διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων ἀπ’ αἰῶνος αὐτοῦ προφητῶν	1	When the prophets spoke long ago, it was as if God himself was speaking because he told them what to say. Alternate translation: “about which things God spoke long ago by telling his holy prophets to speak about them”
247	3:21	a12i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	στόματος τῶν ἁγίων & αὐτοῦ προφητῶν	1	Here the word “mouth” refers to the words that the prophets spoke and wrote down. Alternate translation: “the words of his holy prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
248	3:22	v5nf			προφήτην & ἀναστήσει & ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ	1	“will cause a one of your brothers to become a true prophet, and everyone will know about him”
249	3:22	t8di			τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν	1	“your nation”
250	3:23	t8a5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive		1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that prophet, God will completely destroy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
251	3:24	y1z7				0	Peter finishes his speech to the Jews that he began in Acts 3:12.
252	3:24	u6x3			καὶ πάντες δὲ οἱ προφῆται	1	“In fact, all the prophets.” Here the word “Yes” adds emphasis to what follows.
253	3:24	xp9h			ἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς	1	“beginning with Samuel and continuing with the prophets who lived after he did”
254	3:24	m9pr			τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας	1	“these times” or “the things that are happening now”
255	3:25	rh2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν, καὶ τῆς διαθήκης	1	Here the word “sons” refers to heirs who will receive what the prophets and the covenant promised. Alternate translation: “You are the heirs of the prophets and heirs of the covenant” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
256	3:25	mad5			ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου	1	“Because of your offspring”
257	3:25	g31m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	Here the word “families” refers to people groups or nations. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the people groups in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
258	3:26	b7tz			ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ	1	“After God caused Jesus to become his servant and made him famous”
259	3:26	z5q6			τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ	1	This refers to the Messiah, Jesus.
260	3:26	x8ss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν	1	Here “turning … from” is a metaphor for causing someone stop doing something. Alternate translation: “causing every one of you to stop doing wicked things” or “causing every one of you to repent from your wickedness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
261	4:intro	pv3a				0	Acts 04 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25-26. Special concepts in this chapter Unity The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help. “Signs and wonders” This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he can do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true. Important figures of speech in this chapter Cornerstone The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything about the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Name “There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). With these words Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or will ever be on earth can save people.
262	4:1	ew3l				0	The religious leaders arrest Peter and John after Peter’s having healed the man who was born lame.
263	4:1	abc4			λαλούντων & αὐτῶν	1	“As Peter and John were speaking”
264	4:1	d3tv			ἐπέστησαν αὐτοῖς	1	“approached them” or “came to them”
265	4:2	m74s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διαπονούμενοι	1	“They were very angry.” The Sadducees, in particular, would have been angry about what Peter and John were saying because they did not believe in resurrection. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
266	4:2	abc5			τὸ διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς	1	“Peter and John were teaching”
267	4:2	mg5l			καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way as he had raised Jesus from among the dead. Translate this in a way that allows “the resurrection” to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people.
268	4:2	np5g			τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
269	4:3	zla7			ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς	1	“The priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees arrested Peter and John”
270	4:3	h5f9			ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα	1	It was common practice not to question people at night.
271	4:4	bm1f			ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν	1	This refers only to men who believed and does not include how many women or children believed.
272	4:4	qd8g			ἐγενήθη & ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε	1	“grew to about five thousand”
273	4:5	j6p8				0	Here the word “their” refers to the Jewish people as a whole.
274	4:5	i9tj				0	The rulers question Peter and John who answer without fear.
275	4:5	lw2d			ἐγένετο	1	This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
276	4:5	cdj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	This is a reference to the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling court, which consisted of these three groups of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
277	4:6	l44n			Ἰωάννης, καὶ Ἀλέξανδρος	1	These two men were members of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle.
278	4:7	abc6			στήσαντες αὐτοὺς	1	“When they had set Peter and John”
279	4:7	t1eq			ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει	1	“Who gave you power”
280	4:7	jc21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι	1	Here the word “name” refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by whose authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
281	4:8	su5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τότε Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	This can be stated in active form. See how you translated this in Acts 2:4. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit filled Peter and he” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
282	4:9	pq85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα & ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται	1	Peter asks this question to clarify that this was the real reason that they were on trial. Alternate translation: “You are asking us this day … by what means we made this man well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
283	4:9	je6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us this day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
284	4:9	b92n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “by what means we have made this man well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
285	4:10	snd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “May all of you and all of the people of Israel know this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
286	4:10	j3px			πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	“to you who are questioning us and to all the other people of Israel”
287	4:10	khn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	Here the word “name” refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: “by the power of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
288	4:10	jyj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
289	4:11	tdw8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Peter as well as those to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
290	4:11	nwg6				0	Peter completes his speech to the Jewish religious rulers that he began in Acts 4:8.
291	4:11	w195		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ λίθος & ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	Peter is quoting from the Psalms. This is a metaphor that means the religious leaders, like builders, rejected Jesus, but God will made him the most important in his kingdom, as a cornerstone in a building is important. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
292	4:11	f1nx			κεφαλὴν	1	Here the word “head” means “most important” or “vital.”
293	4:11	c1bh			ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων	1	“you as builders rejected” or “you as builders rejected as worth nothing”
294	4:12	tq3z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ	1	The noun “salvation” can be translated as a verb. This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: “He is the only person who is able to save” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
295	4:12	l66w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ γὰρ ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “no other name under heaven that God has given among men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
296	4:12	iz7k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐδὲ & ὄνομά & ἕτερον & δεδομένον ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1	The phrase “name … given among men” refers to the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: “no other person under heaven, who is given among men, by whom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
297	4:12	jm25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	This is a way of referring to everywhere in the world. Alternate translation: “in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
298	4:12	gg8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “which can save us” or “who can save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
299	4:13	xn39				0	Here the second instance of “they” refers to Peter and John. All other occurrences of the word “they” in this section refer to the Jewish leaders.
300	4:13	t6kc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου	1	Here the abstract noun “boldness” refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders, and can be translated with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
301	4:13	p9pq			παρρησίαν	1	having no fear
302	4:13	qaa5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καταλαβόμενοι ὅτι ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται	1	The Jewish leaders “realized” this because of the way Peter and John spoke. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
303	4:13	r6d6			καὶ καταλαβόμενοι	1	“and understood”
304	4:13	erv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί & ἰδιῶτα	1	The words “ordinary” and “uneducated” share similar meanings. They emphasize that Peter and John had received no formal training in Jewish law. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
305	4:14	h3cy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τόν & ἄνθρωπον & τὸν τεθεραπευμένον	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
306	4:14	fq4w			οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν	1	“nothing to say against Peter and John’s healing of the man.” Here the word “this” refers to what Peter and John had done.
307	4:15	ql31			αὐτοὺς	1	This refers to Peter and John.
308	4:16	p4g6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις	1	The Jewish leaders ask this question out of frustration because they could not think of what to do with Peter and John. Alternate translation: “There is nothing that we can do with these men!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
309	4:16	nh5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γὰρ γνωστὸν σημεῖον γέγονεν δι’ αὐτῶν, πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ φανερόν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “For everyone who lives in Jerusalem knows that they have done a remarkable miracle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
310	4:16	jn12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	This is a generalization. It may also be an exaggeration to show that the leaders think that this is a very big problem. Alternate translation: “many of the people who live in Jerusalem” or “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
311	4:17	f71l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ	1	Here the word “it” refers to any miracles or teaching Peter and John might continue to do. Alternate translation: “in order that news of this miracle spreads no further” or “in order that no more people hear about this miracle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
312	4:17	w52j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μηκέτι λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων	1	Here the word “name” refers to the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: “not to speak anymore to anyone about this person, Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
313	4:19	hf3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Peter and John but not to those whom they are addressing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
314	4:19	jf1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here the phrase “in the sight of God” refers to God’s opinion. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
315	4:21	gy8d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Verse 22 gives background information about the age of the lame man who was healed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
316	4:21	y5y1			οἱ δὲ προσαπειλησάμενοι	1	The Jewish leaders again threatened to punish Peter and John.
317	4:21	z2bx			μηδὲν εὑρίσκοντες τὸ πῶς κολάσωνται αὐτούς	1	Although the Jewish leaders threatened Peter and John, they could not find a reason to punish them without causing the people to riot.
318	4:21	jbl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπὶ τῷ γεγονότι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “for what Peter and John had done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
319	4:22	ju4w			ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	“The man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed”
320	4:23	j3ap				0	Speaking together, the people quote a Psalm of David from the Old Testament. Here the word “they” refers to the rest of the believers, but not to Peter and John.
321	4:23	j2cx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους	1	The phrase “their own people” refers to the rest of the believers. Alternate translation: “went to the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
322	4:24	zu28			ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἦραν φωνὴν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν	1	To raise the voice is an idiom for speaking. “they began speaking together to God” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
323	4:25	vc5z			ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών	1	This means that the Holy Spirit caused David to speak or write down what God said.
324	4:25	ka83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν & στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου	1	Here the word “mouth” refers to the words that David spoke or wrote down. Alternate translation: “by the words of your servant, our father David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
325	4:25	kat6			τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν & Δαυεὶδ	1	Here “father” refers to “ancestor/”
326	4:25	f1x6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά	1	This is a rhetorical question that emphasizes the futility of opposing God. Alternate translation: “The Gentile nations should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
327	4:25	w622		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά	1	These “useless things” consist of plans to oppose God. Alternate translation: “the peoples imagine useless things against God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
328	4:25	h6rc			λαοὶ	1	people groups
329	4:26	fb5a				0	The believers complete their quotation from King David in the Psalms that they began in Acts 4:25.
330	4:26	w2by		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	These two lines mean basically the same thing. The two lines emphasize the combined effort of the earth’s rulers to oppose God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
331	4:26	w64b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παρέστησαν & συνήχθησαν	1	These two phrases mean that they joined their armies together to fight a battle. Alternate translation: “set their armies together … gathered their troops together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
332	4:26	yv19			κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Here the word “Lord” refers to God. In the Psalms, the word “Christ” refers to the Messiah or God’s anointed one.
333	4:27	b1g9				0	The believers continue praying.
334	4:27	nuc1			ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ	1	“this city” refers to Jerusalem.
335	4:27	ca33			τὸν ἅγιον παῖδά σου Ἰησοῦν	1	“Jesus who serves you faithfully”
336	4:28	yz7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ποιῆσαι ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν	1	Here the word “hand” is used to mean God’s power. Additionally, the phrase “your hand and your desire decided” shows God’s power and plan. Alternate translation: “to do all that you had decided because you are powerful and did all that you planned” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
337	4:29	b38z				0	The believers complete their prayer that they began in Acts 4:24.
338	4:29	t5qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν	1	Here the words “look upon” are a request for God to take notice of the way in which the Jewish leaders threatened the believers. Alternate translation: “notice how they threaten to punish us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
339	4:29	zh7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης λαλεῖν τὸν λόγον σου	1	The word “word” here is a metonym for God’s message. The abstract noun “boldness” can be translated as an adverb. Alternate translation: “speak your message boldly” or “be bold when we speak your message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
340	4:30	x9r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν	1	Here the word “hand” refers to God’s power. This is a request for God to show how powerful he is. Alternate translation: “while you show your power by healing people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
341	4:30	t5uw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ	1	Here the word “name” refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power of your holy servant Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
342	4:30	txb5			τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ	1	“Jesus who serves you faithfully.” See how you translated this in Acts 4:27.
343	4:31	x9b3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσαλεύθη ὁ τόπος	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the place … shook” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
344	4:31	ps3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	This can be stated in active form. See how you translated this in Acts 2:4. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
345	4:32	xu3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία	1	Here the word “heart” refers to the thoughts and the word “soul” refers to the emotions. Together they refer to the total person. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and wanted the same things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
346	4:32	zyp5			ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά	1	“shared their belongings with one another.” See how you translated this in Acts 2:44.
347	4:33	d8dr			χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1	Possible meanings are: (1) that God was greatly blessing the believers or (2) that the people in Jerusalem held the believers in very high esteem.
348	4:34	gw3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὅσοι & κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον	1	The word “all” here is a generalization. Alternate translation: “Many people who owned title to lands or houses” or “People who owned title to lands or houses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
349	4:34	ti1h			κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον	1	“owned land or houses”
350	4:34	l938		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things that they sold” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
351	4:35	vv4z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	This means that they presented the money to the apostles. Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” or “gave it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
352	4:35	ps4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διεδίδετο & ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν	1	The noun “need” can be translated with a verb. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they distributed the money to each believer who needed it” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
353	4:36	uc2a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants		0	Luke introduces Barnabas into the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
354	4:36	nr4v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	The apostles used this name to show that Joseph was a person who encouraged others. “Son of” is an idiom used to describe a person’s behavior or character. Alternate translation: “Encourager” or “one who encourages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
355	4:37	gtv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔθηκεν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	This means that they presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated this in Acts 4:35. Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” or “gave it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
356	5:intro	k2uh				0	Acts 05 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter “Satan filled your heart to lie to the Holy Spirit” No one knows for sure if Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (Acts 5:1-10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers.
357	5:1	v27a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Continuing the story of how the new Christians shared their belongings with other believers, Luke tells about two believers, Ananias and Sapphria. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/writing-background]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
358	5:1	ysl9			δέ	1	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line to tell a new part of the story.
359	5:2	xm1t			συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός	1	“his wife also knew that he kept back part of the sale money”
360	5:2	dy8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν	1	This means that they presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated this in Acts 4:35. Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” or “gave it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
361	5:3	y7j6				0	If your language does not use rhetorical questions, you may reword these as statements.
362	5:3	grr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου	1	Peter uses this question to rebuke Ananias. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart to lie … land.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
363	5:3	pqd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου	1	Here the word “heart” is a metonym for the will and emotions. The phrase “Satan filled your heart” is a metaphor. Possible meanings of the metaphor are (1) “Satan completely controlled you” or (2) “Satan convinced you” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
364	5:3	zz5u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς	1	This implies that Ananias had told the apostles that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
365	5:4	vu7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ μένον σοὶ ἔμενεν, καὶ πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν	1	Peter uses this question to rebuke Ananias. Alternate translation: “While it remained unsold, it was your own … control.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
366	5:4	vi8w			ἔμενεν	1	“While you had not sold it”
367	5:4	wm2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν	1	Peter uses this question to rebuke Ananias. Alternate translation: “after it was sold, you had control over the money that you received.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
368	5:4	k7nc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πραθὲν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “after you sold it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
369	5:4	i5dw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο	1	Peter used this question to rebuke Ananias. Here the word “heart” refers to the will and emotions. Alternate translation: “You should not have thought of doing this thing” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
370	5:5	cc5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν	1	Here “breathed his last” means “breathed his final breath” and is a polite way of saying that he died. Ananias fell down because he died; he did not die because he fell down. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
371	5:7	ry54			ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ & εἰσῆλθεν	1	“Ananias’ wife came in” or “Sapphira came in”
372	5:7	k3c9			τὸ γεγονὸς	1	“that her husband had died”
373	5:8	bcf6			τοσούτου	1	“for this much money.” This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles.
374	5:9	w1lb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here the word “you” is plural and refers to both Ananias and Sapphira. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
375	5:9	vym8				0	This is the end of the part of the story about Ananias and Sapphira.
376	5:9	v7sw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	Peter asks this question to rebuke Sapphira. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
377	5:9	hc22			συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν	1	“the two of you have agreed together”
378	5:9	pg1e			πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	Here the word “test” means to challenge or to prove. They were trying to see if they could get away with lying to God without receiving punishment.
379	5:9	xj1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου	1	Here the phrase “the feet” refers to the men. Alternate translation: “the men who have buried your husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
380	5:10	nwb9			ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	This means that when she died, she fell on the floor in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with falling down at a person’s feet as a sign of humility.
381	5:10	s7en		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐξέψυξεν	1	Here “breathed his last” means “breathed her final breath” and is a polite way of saying “she died.” See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 5:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
382	5:12	aud2				0	Here the words “They” and “they” refer to the believers.
383	5:12	c2e7				0	Luke continues to tell what happens in the early days of the church.
384	5:12	lde1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ δὲ τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ	1	or “Many signs and wonders took place among the people through the hands of the apostles.” This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The apostles performed many signs and wonders among the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
385	5:12	ux3n			σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1	“supernatural events and miraculous deeds.” See how you translated these terms in Acts 2:22
386	5:12	sri8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	διὰ & τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	Here the word “hands” refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “through the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
387	5:12	k99k			Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος	1	This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof, and which people named after king Solomon. See how you translated “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in Acts 3:11.
388	5:13	qd8r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐμεγάλυνεν αὐτοὺς ὁ λαός	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the people held the believers in high esteem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
389	5:14	l9bs				0	Here the word “they” refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem.
390	5:14	m9wx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μᾶλλον & προσετίθεντο πιστεύοντες τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	This could be stated in active form. See how you translated “were added” in Acts 2:41. Alternate translation: “more people were believing in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
391	5:15	y2ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν	1	It is implied that God would heal them if Peter’s shadow touched them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
392	5:16	fu1a			ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων	1	“those whom unclean spirits had afflicted”
393	5:16	lyc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God healed them all” or “the apostles healed them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
394	5:17	p4ta				0	The religious leaders began to persecute the believers.
395	5:17	x2ed			δὲ	1	This begins a contrasting story. You may translate this in the way that your language introduces a contrasting narrative.
396	5:17	f9ye		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς	1	Here the phrase “rose up” means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the high priest took action” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
397	5:17	pc45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	The abstract noun “jealousy” can be translated as an adjective. This could be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they became very jealous” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
398	5:18	j58p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους	1	This means that they seized the apostles by force. They would have ordered guards to do this. Alternate translation: “had the guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
399	5:19	wd37				0	Here the words “them” and “they” refer to the apostles.
400	5:20	qm16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	This phrase here refers to the temple courtyard, not to the temple building where only the priests were allowed. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
401	5:20	z1x3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης	1	The word “words” here is a metonym for the message that the apostles had already proclaimed. Possible meanings are (1) “all this message of eternal life” or (2) “the whole message of this new way of living” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
402	5:21	df1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	They went into the temple courtyard, not into the temple building where only the priests were allowed. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
403	5:21	l7uf			ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον	1	“as it began to be light.” Although the angel led them out of the jail during the night, the sun was rising by the time the apostles reached the temple courtyard.
404	5:21	li6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον ἀχθῆναι αὐτούς	1	This implies someone went to the jail. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the jail to bring the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
405	5:23	ld7d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν	1	The words “no one” refer to the apostles. This implies that there was no one else in the jail cell besides the apostles. Alternate translation: “we did not find them inside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
406	5:24	a8dz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here the word “you” is plural and refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
407	5:24	k5g6			διηπόρουν	1	“they were very puzzled” or “they were very confused”
408	5:24	baw2			περὶ αὐτῶν	1	“concerning the words they had just heard” or “concerning these things”
409	5:24	p78m			τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο	1	“and what would happen as a result”
410	5:25	c1am		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες	1	They did not go into the part of the temple building where only the priests were allowed. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
411	5:26	f7pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	The word “they” in this section refers to the captain and the officers. In the phrase “feared that the people might stone them” the word “them” refers to the captain and the officers. All other occurrences of “them” in this chunk refer to the apostles. Here the word “you” is plural and refers to the apostles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
412	5:26	e24h				0	The captain and the officers bring the apostles before the Jewish religious council.
413	5:26	i2v5			ἐφοβοῦντο	1	“they were afraid”
414	5:27	iq7w			ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτοὺς ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς	1	“The high priest questioned them.” The word “interrogate” means to question someone to find out what is true.
415	5:28	g2hi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	Here the word “name” refers to the person of Jesus. See how you translated this in Acts 4:17. Alternate translation: “not to speak anymore about this person, Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
416	5:28	j4kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν	1	Teaching many people in a city is spoken of as if they were filling the city with a teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught many people in Jerusalem about him” or “you have taught about him throughout the Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
417	5:28	ym1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς τὸ αἷμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου	1	Here the word “blood” is a metonym for death, and to bring someone’s blood on people is a metaphor for saying that they are guilty of that person’s death. Alternate translation: “desire to make us responsible for this man’s death” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
418	5:29	y211		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “We” refers to the apostles, and not to the audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
419	5:29	di9u			ἀποκριθεὶς & Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι	1	Peter spoke on behalf of all of the apostles when he said the following words.
420	5:30	r7av		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν ἤγειρεν Ἰησοῦν	1	Here “raised up” is an idiom. Alternate translation: “The God of our fathers caused Jesus to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
421	5:30	pu5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	Here Peter uses the word “tree” to refer to the cross which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “by hanging him on a cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
422	5:31	uh2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς & ὕψωσεν, τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ	1	To be at the “right hand of God” is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “God exalted him to the place of honor beside him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
423	5:31	mr1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1	The words “repentance” and “forgiveness” can be translated as verbs. Alternate translation: “give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
424	5:31	q1il		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	The word “Israel” refers to the Jewish people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
425	5:32	yml6			τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ	1	“those who submit to God’s authority”
426	5:33	ekh2				0	Gamaliel addresses the council members.
427	5:33	abx6			ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς	1	“kill the apostles”
428	5:34	i2rr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Γαμαλιήλ, νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	Luke introduces Gamaliel and provides background information about him. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/writing-participants]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
429	5:34	fpr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
430	5:34	xk6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω & τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “commanded the guards to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
431	5:35	ae1u			προσέχετε	1	“think carefully about” or “be cautious about.” Gamaliel was warning them not to do something that they would later regret.
432	5:36	uaj6			ἀνέστη Θευδᾶς	1	Possible meanings are (1) “Theudas rebelled” or (2) “Theudas appeared.”
433	5:36	b3nl			λέγων εἶναί τινα	1	“claiming to be somebody important”
434	5:36	ie3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ἀνῃρέθη	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “People killed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
435	5:36	juz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντες ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ διελύθησαν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “all the people scattered who had been obeying him” or “all who had been obeying him went in different directions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
436	5:36	rzg5			ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν	1	This means that they did not do what they had planned to do.
437	5:37	f33y			μετὰ τοῦτον	1	“After Theudas”
438	5:37	p56f			ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς	1	“during the time of the census”
439	5:37	kz4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ	1	This means that he persuaded some people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “caused many people to follow him” or “caused many people to join him in rebellion” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
440	5:38	i4bw				0	Gamaliel finishes addressing the council members. Though they beat the apostles, command them not to teach about Jesus, and let them go, the disciples continue to teach and preach.
441	5:38	wz89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπόστητε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων καὶ ἄφετε αὐτούς	1	Gamaliel is telling the Jewish leaders no to punish the apostles any more or to put them back in jail. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
442	5:38	zh1d			ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη ἢ τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο	1	“if men have devised this plan or are doing this work”
443	5:38	uql8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταλυθήσεται	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “someone will overthrow it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
444	5:39	j819		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰ & ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1	Here the word “it” refers to “this plan or work.” Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
445	5:39	cyp1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπείσθησαν δὲ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “So Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
446	5:40	z31c				0	Here first word “they” refers to the council members. The rest of the words “them,” “They,” and “they” refer to the apostles.
447	5:40	p6lz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες	1	The council members would have ordered the temple guards to do these things. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
448	5:40	fca9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here “name” refers to the authority of Jesus. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 4:18. Alternate translation: “to speak anymore in the authority of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
449	5:41	cv8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηξιώθησαν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος ἀτιμασθῆναι	1	The apostles rejoiced because God had honored them by letting the Jewish leaders dishonor them. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God had counted them worthy to suffer dishonor for the Name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
450	5:41	lk82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος	1	Here “the Name” refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
451	5:42	jj94			πᾶσάν τε ἡμέραν	1	“After that day, every day.” This phrase marks what the apostles did every day through the following days.
452	5:42	kyp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ καὶ κατ’ οἶκον	1	They did not go into the temple building where only the priests went. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard and in different people’s houses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
453	6:intro	z5r5				0	Acts 06 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter The distribution to the widows The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them had lived in Judea and spoke Hebrew, and others had lived in Gentile areas and spoke Greek. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “His face was like the face of an angel” No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. It is best for the translation to say only what the ULT says about this.
454	6:1	ky47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	This is the beginning of a new part of the story. Luke gives important background information to understand the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
455	6:1	f8br		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	Consider how new parts of a story are introduced in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
456	6:1	t94s			πληθυνόντων	1	“was greatly increasing”
457	6:1	e7vb			Ἑλληνιστῶν	1	These were Jews who had lived most of their lives somewhere in the Roman Empire outside of Israel, and had grown up speaking Greek. Their language and culture were somewhat different from those who had grown up in Israel.
458	6:1	ftz8			τοὺς Ἑβραίους	1	These were Jews who had grown up in Israel speaking Hebrew or Aramaic. The church consisted of only Jews and converts to Judaism so far.
459	6:1	e1z9			αἱ χῆραι	1	women whose husband has died
460	6:1	s4qy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρεθεωροῦντο & αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Hebrew believers were overlooking the Grecian widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
461	6:1	k4jg			παρεθεωροῦντο	1	“being ignored” or “being forgotten.” There were so many who needed help that some were missed.
462	6:1	rde8			διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ	1	The money that was being given to the apostles was used in part to buy food for the early church widows.
463	6:2	jr1y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here the word “you” refers to the believers. The words “us” and “we” here refer to the 12 apostles. Where applicable, use the exclusive form in your language. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
464	6:2	n5r4			οἱ δώδεκα	1	This refers to the eleven apostles plus Matthias, who was selected in Acts 1:26.
465	6:2	g56w			τὸ πλῆθος τῶν μαθητῶν	1	“all of the disciples” or “all the believers”
466	6:2	jm17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This is an exaggeration in order to emphasize the importance of their task of teaching the word of God. Alternate translation: “stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
467	6:2	fwk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διακονεῖν τραπέζαις	1	This is a phrase meaning to serve food to the people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
468	6:3	y3bm			ἄνδρας & πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας	1	Possible meanings are (1) the men have three qualities—a good reputation, being full of the Spirit, and being full of wisdom or (2) the men have a reputation for two qualities—being full of the Spirit, and being full of wisdom .
469	6:3	p1yz			ἄνδρας & μαρτυρουμένους	1	“men that people know are good” or “men whom people trust”
470	6:3	i27a			ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης	1	“to be responsible to do this task”
471	6:4	b3bj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τῇ διακονίᾳ τοῦ λόγου	1	It may be helpful to add more information. Alternate translation: “the ministry of teaching and preaching the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
472	6:5	wh9t			ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους	1	“All the disciples liked their suggestion”
473	6:5	ajq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Στέφανον, & καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, καὶ Φίλιππον, καὶ Πρόχορον, καὶ Νικάνορα	1	These are Greek names, and suggest that all of the men elected were from the Grecian Jewish group of believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
474	6:5	qas9			προσήλυτον	1	a Gentile who converted to the Jewish religion
475	6:6	wu1y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	This represented giving a blessing and imparting responsibility and authority for the work to the seven. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
476	6:7	x48w				0	This verse gives an update on the church’s growth.
477	6:7	wu4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν	1	The writer speaks of the growing number of people who believed the word as if the word of God itself were covering a larger area. Alternate translation: “the number of people who believed the word of God increased” or “the number of people who believed the message from God increased” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
478	6:7	jg8y			ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει	1	“followed the teaching of the new belief”
479	6:7	qq3l			τῇ πίστει	1	Possible meanings are (1) the gospel message of trust in Jesus or (2) the teaching of the church or (3) the Christian teaching.
480	6:8	wn1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	These verses give background information about Stephen and other people that is important to understanding the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
481	6:8	n3re				0	This is the beginning of a new part of the story.
482	6:8	et2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Στέφανος δὲ	1	This introduces Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
483	6:8	h8sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	The words “grace” and “power” here refer to power from God. This could be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “God was giving Stephen power to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
484	6:9	k88n			συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων	1	“Freedmen” were probably ex-slaves from these different locations. It is unclear if the other people listed were part of the synagogue or just participated in the debate with Stephen.
485	6:9	j8pq			συνζητοῦντες τῷ Στεφάνῳ	1	“arguing with Stephen”
486	6:10	s2cl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “We” refers only to the men they persuaded to lie. The word “they” refers back to the people from the synagogue of the freemen in Acts 6:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
487	6:10	fp41				0	The background information that began in Acts 6:8 continues through verse 10.
488	6:10	v5ia		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι	1	This phrase means they could not prove false what he said. Alternate translation: “could not argue against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
489	6:10	fnb2			Πνεύματι	1	this refers to the Holy Spirit
490	6:11	ren5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄνδρας λέγοντας	1	They were given money to give false testimony. Alternate translation: “some men to lie and say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
491	6:11	x747			ῥήματα βλάσφημα εἰς	1	“bad things about”
492	6:12	tqk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Each use of word “they” most likely refers back to the people from the synagogue of the Freedmen in Acts 6:9. They were responsible for the false witnesses and for inciting the council, the elders, the scribes, and the other people. Here the word “we” refers only to the false witness that they brought to testify. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
493	6:12	l251			συνεκίνησάν & τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	“caused the people, the elders, and the scribes to be very angry at Stephen”
494	6:12	j3wd			συνήρπασαν αὐτὸν	1	“grabbed him and held him so he could not get away”
495	6:13	zv6s			οὐ παύεται λαλῶν	1	“continually speaks”
496	6:14	vak4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν	1	The phrase “handed down” means “passed on.” Alternate translation: “taught our ancestors” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
497	6:15	gf7e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀτενίσαντες εἰς αὐτὸν	1	This is an idiom that means they looked intently at him. Here “eyes” is a metonym for sight. Alternate translation: “looked intently at him” or “stared at him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
498	6:15	k8rw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου	1	This phrase compares his face to that of an angel but does not say specifically what they have in common. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
499	7:intro	p9h4				0	Acts 07 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42-43 and 49-50. It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter. Special concepts in this chapter “Stephen said” Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them. “Full of the Holy Spirit” The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say. Foreshadowing When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul, also known as Paul, here, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Paul is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts. Important figures of speech in this chapter Implied information Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” (Acts 7:9), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Metonymy Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Background knowledge The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was telling them about. They knew what Moses had written in the Book of Genesis. If the Book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to understand what Stephen said.
500	7:1	pt4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	The word “our” includes both Steven, the Jewish council to whom he spoke, and the entire audience. The word “your” is singular refers to Abraham. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
501	7:1	hy9r				0	The part of the story about Stephen, which began in Acts 6:8, continues. Stephen begins his response to the high priest and the council by talking about things that happened in Israel’s history. Most of this history comes from Moses’ writings.
502	7:2	abc7			ὁ δὲ ἔφη	1	Stephen is speaking.
503	7:2	v5si			ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες, ἀκούσατε	1	Stephen was being very respectful to the council in greeting them as extended family.
504	7:4	pfg3				0	In verse 4 the words “he,” “his,” and “him” refer to Abraham. In verse 5 the words “He” and “he” refer to God, but the word “him” refers to Abraham.
505	7:4	pfg4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here the word “you” refers to the Jewish council and audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
506	7:5	ax1j			οὐκ ἔδωκεν & ἐν αὐτῇ	1	“He did not give any of it”
507	7:5	qff6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός	1	Possible meanings for this phrase are (1) enough ground to stand on or (2) enough ground to take a step. Alternate translation: “a very tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
508	7:5	u6iw			εἰς κατάσχεσιν αὐτὴν, καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν	1	“for Abraham to own and to give to his descendants”
509	7:6	tn6b			ἐλάλησεν & οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς	1	It may be helpful to state that this occurred later than the statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Later God told Abraham”
510	7:6	t1h9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	ἔτη τετρακόσια	1	“400 years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
511	7:7	f7fw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔθνος & κρινῶ ἐγώ	1	“nation” refers to the people in it. Alternate translation: “I will judge the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
512	7:7	q7y6			τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν	1	“the nation that they will serve”
513	7:8	mwc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς	1	The Jews would have understood that this covenant required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “made a covenant with Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
514	7:8	g4bb			οὕτως ἐγέννησεν τὸν Ἰσαὰκ	1	The story transitions to Abraham’s descendants.
515	7:8	ams1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	Ἰακὼβ τοὺς	1	“Jacob became the father.” Stephen shortened this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
516	7:9	n981			οἱ πατριάρχαι	1	“Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers”
517	7:9	tik7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	The Jews knew their ancestors sold Joseph to be a slave in Egypt. Alternate translation: “sold him as a slave in Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
518	7:9	w1is		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦν & μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	This is an idiom for helping someone. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
519	7:10	yr7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	This refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
520	7:10	pb4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1	This refers to all his possessions. Alternate translation: “everything he owned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
521	7:11	p42j			ἦλθεν & λιμὸς	1	“a famine came.” The ground stopped producing food.
522	7:11	p37v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	This refers Jacob and his sons, who were the ancestors of the Jewish people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
523	7:12	pia8			σιτία	1	Grain was the most common food at that time.
524	7:12	mbg8			τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν	1	Here this phrase refers to Jabob’s sons, Joseph’s older brothers.
525	7:13	ce2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	“On their next trip” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
526	7:13	m37e			ἀνεγνωρίσθη	1	Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother.
527	7:13	jxk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
528	7:14	aam5			ἀποστείλας	1	“sent his brothers back to Canaan” or “sent his brothers back home”
529	7:15	w2sm			ἐτελεύτησεν	1	Make sure it does not sound as though he died as soon as he arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob died”
530	7:15	fe56			αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	“Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors”
531	7:16	slg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ μετετέθησαν & καὶ ἐτέθησαν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants carried Jacob’s body and his son’s bodies over … and buried them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
532	7:16	la8a			τιμῆς ἀργυρίου	1	“with money”
533	7:17	np3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “our” includes Stephen and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
534	7:17	tuq2				1	In some languages it may be helpful to say that the people increased in number before saying that the time of the promise arrived.
535	7:17	tlh9			ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	It was close to the time that God would fulfill his promise to Abraham.
536	7:18	whe7			ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος	1	“another king began to rule”
537	7:18	g2wq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	“Egypt” refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
538	7:18	e2y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ	1	“Joseph” refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
539	7:20	q66s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς	1	This introduces Moses into the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
540	7:20	cd5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ	1	This phrase is an idiom that means Moses was very beautiful. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
541	7:20	pnb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνετράφη	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “his parents nourished him” or “his parents cared for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
542	7:21	w3iu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ	1	Moses was “placed outside” because of Pharaoh’s command. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “When his parents placed him outside” or “When they abandoned him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
543	7:21	url3			ἡ θυγάτηρ Φαραὼ, καὶ ἀνεθρέψατο αὐτὸν ἑαυτῇ εἰς υἱόν	1	She did for him every good thing a mother would do for her own son. Use your language’s normal word for what a mother does to make sure her son becomes a healthy adult.
544	7:21	mbp7			εἰς υἱόν	1	“as if he were her own son”
545	7:22	c9nw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The Egyptians educated Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
546	7:22	att9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων	1	This is an exaggeration to emphasize that he was trained in the best schools in Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
547	7:22	m3dm			δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ	1	“effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did”
548	7:23	fj9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ	1	Here “heart” is a metonym for “mind.” The phrase “it came into his heart” is an idiom that means to decide something. Alternate translation: “it came into his mind” or “he decided” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
549	7:23	x493		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπισκέψασθαι τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ	1	This refers to his people, and not just to his family. Alternate translation: “see how his own people, the children of Israel, were doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
550	7:24	l4zv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον, ἠμύνατο καὶ ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1	This can be stated in active form by rearranging the order. Alternate translation: “Seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite, Moses defended and avenged the Israelite by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
551	7:24	abc8			ἠμύνατο	1	Moses defended the Israelite who was being mistreated.
552	7:24	r2e8			πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1	Moses hit the Egyptian so hard that he died.
553	7:25	wm3j			ἐνόμιζεν	1	“he imagined”
554	7:25	nhb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς	1	Here “hand” refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “was rescuing them through what Moses was doing” or “was using the actions of Moses to rescue them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
555	7:26	t1hw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “us” refers to the Israelites but does not include Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
556	7:26	t2vc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτοῖς μαχομένοις	1	The audience would have known from the account in Exodus that these were two Israelite men, but Stephen does not specify that. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
557	7:26	mpc7			συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην	1	“urged them to stop fighting”
558	7:26	zzt4			ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε	1	Moses was addressing the Israelites who were fighting.
559	7:26	k1ku		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους	1	Moses asked this question to encourage them to stop fighting. Alternate translation: “you should not hurt each other!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
560	7:27	q2r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν?	1	The man used this question to rebuke Moses. Alternate translation: “You have no authority over us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
561	7:28	hk1g			μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1	The man used this question to warn Moses that he and probably others knew Moses had killed the Egyptian.
562	7:29	l149		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit		0	Stephen’s audience already knew that Moses had married a Midianite woman when he fled Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
563	7:29	q8qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	The implied information is that Moses understood that the Israelites knew that he had killed an Egyptian the day before (Acts 7:28). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
564	7:30	zx1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα	1	“After 40 years passed.” This was the amount of time Moses had been in Midian. Alternate translation: “Forty years after Moses fled from Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
565	7:30	f7yu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὤφθη & ἄγγελος	1	Stephen’s audience knew that God spoke through the angel. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
566	7:31	q6w6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα	1	Moses was surprised that the bush was not burning up in the fire. This was previously known by Stephen’s audience. Alternate translation: “because the bush was not burning up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
567	7:31	uk7u			προσερχομένου δὲ αὐτοῦ κατανοῆσαι	1	This may mean Moses initially drew close to the bush to investigate.
568	7:32	b4q6			ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου	1	“I am the God whom your ancestors worshiped”
569	7:32	tdr7			ἔντρομος δὲ γενόμενος, Μωϋσῆς οὐκ ἐτόλμα κατανοῆσαι	1	This may mean Moses drew back in fear when he heard the voice.
570	7:32	e19k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔντρομος & γενόμενος, Μωϋσῆς	1	Moses shook from fear. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “Moses trembled with fear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
571	7:33	x7cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα	1	God told Moses this so he would honor God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
572	7:33	clk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1	The implied information is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made holy by God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
573	7:34	yz7b			ἰδὼν, εἶδον	1	“seen for sure.” The word certainly adds emphasis to seen.
574	7:34	x5bg			τοῦ λαοῦ μου	1	The word “my” emphasizes that these people belonged to God. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob”
575	7:34	j32c			κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς	1	“will personally cause their release”
576	7:34	sq8y			νῦν δεῦρο	1	“get ready.” God uses an order here.
577	7:35	x4p2				0	Verses 35-38 contains a series of connected phrases referring to Moses. Each phrase begins with statements such as “This Moses” or “This same Moses” or “This is the man” or “It is the same Moses.” If possible, use similar statements to emphasize Moses. After the Israelites left Egypt, they spent 40 years wandering around the wilderness before God led them into the land he had promised them.
578	7:35	gn6e			τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν, ὃν ἠρνήσαντο	1	This refers back to the events recorded in Acts 7:27-28.
579	7:35	vp7e			λυτρωτὴν	1	“rescuer”
580	7:35	yjz9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου τοῦ ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ	1	The hand is a metonym for the action performed by the person. In this case, the angel had commanded Moses to return to Egypt. Stephen speaks as if the angel had a physical hand. You may need to make explicit what action the angel did. Alternate translation: “by the action of the angel” or “by having the angel … bush command him to return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
581	7:35	abc9			ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ	1	The angel appeared to Moses.
582	7:36	gz9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα	1	Stephen’s audience knew about the forty years the Israelites spent in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “during the 40 years that the Israelite people lived in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
583	7:37	b4sg			προφήτην & ἀναστήσει	1	“cause a man to be a prophet”
584	7:37	j2rx			ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν	1	“from among your own people”
585	7:38	l8u7				0	The quotation in verse 40 is from the writings of Moses.
586	7:38	e8qu			οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	“This is the man Moses who was among the Israelites”
587	7:38	fd25			οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος	1	The phrase “This is the man” throughout this passage refers to Moses.
588	7:38	y2zu			ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα δοῦναι ὑμῖν	1	God was the one who gave those words. Alternate translation: “this is the man to whom God spoke living words to give to us”
589	7:38	p3xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λόγια ζῶντα	1	Possible meanings are (1) “a message that endures” or (2) “words that give life.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
590	7:39	mvz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπώσαντο	1	This metaphor emphasizes their rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
591	7:39	z3ze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Here “hearts” is a metonym for people’s thoughts. To do something in the heart means to desire do to something. Alternate translation: “they desired to turn back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
592	7:41	w38i				0	Stephen’s quotation here is from the prophet Amos.
593	7:41	ux1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐμοσχοποίησαν	1	Stephen’s audience knew the calf they made was a statue. Alternate translation: “they made a statue that looked like a calf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
594	7:41	hh77			ἐμοσχοποίησαν & εἰδώλῳ & τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	These phrases all refer to the same statue of the calf.
595	7:42	d3dd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἔστρεψεν & ὁ Θεὸς	1	“God turned away.” This action expresses that God was not pleased with the people and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped correcting them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
596	7:42	rag5			παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς	1	“abandoned them”
597	7:42	u7lx			τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	Possible meanings for the original phrase are (1) the stars only or (2) the sun, moon, and stars.
598	7:42	f314			βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν	1	This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets into one scroll. It would also have included the writings of Amo.
599	7:42	gd1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ	1	God asked this question to show Israel they did not worship Him with their sacrifices. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices … Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
600	7:42	j4q8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἶκος Ἰσραήλ	1	This refers to the whole nation of Israel. Alternate translation: “all you Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
601	7:43	zek5				0	The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
602	7:43	fs4q				0	Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in Acts 7:2.
603	7:43	rk4z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνελάβετε	1	It is implied that they took these idols with them as they traveled in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “you carried with you from place to place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
604	7:43	im7e			σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ	1	the tent that housed the false god Molech
605	7:43	cq47			ὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ & Ῥαιφάν	1	the star that is identified with the false god Rephan
606	7:43	gm4g			τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε	1	They made statues or images of the gods Molech and Rephan in order to worship them.
607	7:43	zgq6			μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος	1	“I will remove you to places even farther than Babylon.” This would be God’s act of judgment.
608	7:44	m9gw			ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου	1	The tent that housed the ark (a box) with the 10 commandments carved in stone inside it
609	7:45	n2sc			ἣν & εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν μετὰ Ἰησοῦ	1	The phrase “under Joshua” means that their ancestors did these things in obedience to Joshua’s direction. Alternate translation: “our fathers, in accordance with Joshua’s instructions, received the tabernacle and brought it with them”
610	7:45	n1pp			τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν, ὧν ἐξῶσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	This sentence tells why the ancestors were able to take possession of the land. Alternate translation: “God forced the nations to leave the land before the face of our fathers”
611	7:45	spm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν & ὁ Θεὸς ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	Here “the face of our fathers” refers to the presence of their ancestors. Possible meanings are (1) “As our ancestors watched, God took the land from the nations and drove them out” or (2) “When our ancestors came, God took the land from the nations and drove them out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
612	7:45	c2fb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	This refers to the people who lived in the land before Israel. Alternate translation: “the people who previously lived here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
613	7:45	m9ib			ὧν ἐξῶσεν	1	“forced them to leave the land”
614	7:46	w3cu			σκήνωμα τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ	1	“a house for the ark where the God of Jacob could stay.” David wanted a permanent place for the ark to reside in Jerusalem, not in a tent.
615	7:47	a7bx				0	In verses 49 and 50, Stephen quotes from the prophet Isaiah. In the quotation, God is speaking about himself.
616	7:48	c822		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	χειροποιήτοις	1	The hand is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “made by people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
617	7:49	k2vn			ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου	1	The prophet is comparing the greatness of God’s presence to how impossible it is for man to build a place for God to rest on earth since the whole earth is nothing but a place for God to rest his feet.
618	7:49	wc9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι	1	God asks this question to show how useless man’s efforts are to take care of God. Alternate translation: “You can not build a house adequate enough for me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
619	7:49	u1ft		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου	1	God asks this question to show man that he cannot provide God any rest. Alternate translation: “There is no place of rest good enough for me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
620	7:50	rfk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα	1	God asks this question to show that man did not create anything. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
621	7:51	zei2				0	With a sharp rebuke, Stephen finishes his response to the high priest and the council which he began in Acts 7:2.
622	7:51	umq6			σκληροτράχηλοι	1	Stephen shifted from identifying with the Jewish leaders to rebuking them.
623	7:51	vn7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	σκληροτράχηλοι	1	This does not mean their necks were stiff but rather that they were “stubborn.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
624	7:51	zp55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1	The Jews regarded uncircumcised people as disobedient to God. Stephen uses “hearts and ears” to represent to the Jewish leaders who acted the way Gentiles act when they do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “you refuse to obey and hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
625	7:52	x7kf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν	1	Stephen asked this question to show them that they learned nothing from the errors of their forefathers. Alternate translation: “Your forefathers persecuted every prophet!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
626	7:52	q8wb			Δικαίου	1	This refers to the Christ, the Messiah.
627	7:52	agd9			ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε	1	“you have also betrayed and murdered him”
628	7:52	fcc6			φονεῖς	1	“murderers of the Righteous One” or “murderers of the Christ”
629	7:53	euw5			τὸν νόμον εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων	1	“the laws that God caused angels to give to our ancestors”
630	7:54	t4u2				0	The council reacts to Stephen’s words.
631	7:54	ef2g			ἀκούοντες δὲ ταῦτα	1	This is the turning point; the sermon ends and the council members react.
632	7:54	u4l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	διεπρίοντο	1	To “cut to the heart” is an idiom for making a person extremely angry. Alternate translation: “were extremely angry” or “became very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
633	7:54	ae9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen or hatred of Stephen. Alternate translation: “they became so angry that they ground their teeth together” or “moved their teeth back and forth as they looked at Stephen”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
634	7:55	ntp4			ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	“Stared up into heaven.” It appears that only Stephen saw this vision and not anyone else in the crowd.
635	7:55	bl2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἶδεν δόξαν Θεοῦ	1	People normally experienced the glory of God as a bright light. Alternate translation: “saw a bright light from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
636	7:55	vyz3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	καὶ Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	To stand at the “right hand of God” is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “and he saw Jesus standing in the place of honor and authority beside God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
637	7:56	aqp8			Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Stephen refers to Jesus by the title “Son of Man.”
638	7:57	p4cg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν	1	“put their hands on their ears.” They did this to show that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
639	7:58	ks1u			ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως	1	“They seized Stephen and forcefully took him out of the city”
640	7:58	wy7n			τὰ ἱμάτια	1	These are cloaks or robes they would wear outside to stay warm, similar in function to a jacket or coat.
641	7:58	sx2p			παρὰ τοὺς πόδας	1	“in front of.” They were placed there so Saul could watch them.
642	7:58	e2vl			νεανίου	1	Saul was probably around 30 years old at the time.
643	7:59	le7k				0	This ends the story of Stephen.
644	7:59	k2el			δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου	1	“take my spirit.” It may be helpful to add “please” to show that this was a request. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit”
645	7:60	u86q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	θεὶς δὲ τὰ γόνατα	1	This is an act of submission to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
646	7:60	tvf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	This can be stated in a positive way. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
647	7:60	r9vi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐκοιμήθη	1	Here to fall asleep is a euphemism for dying. Alternate translation: “died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
648	8:intro	q9d9				0	Acts 08 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33. The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “So there began.” Special concepts in this chapter Receiving the Holy Spirit In this chapter for the first time Luke speaks of people receiving the Holy Spirit (Acts 8:15-19). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers. Proclaimed This chapter more than any other in the Book of Acts speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
649	8:1	tp9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge		0	It may be helpful to your audience to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
650	8:1	a7uc				0	The story shifts from Stephen to Saul in these verses.
651	8:1	ez88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἐγένετο & ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, τὴν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις. πάντες δὲ διεσπάρησαν κατὰ τὰς χώρας τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ Σαμαρείας, πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	This part of verse 1 is background information about the persecution that began after Stephen’s death. This explains why Saul was persecuting the believers in verse 3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
652	8:1	vc8x			ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	This refers to the day that Stephen died (Acts 7:59-60).
653	8:1	u5pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες & διεσπάρησαν	1	The word “all” is a generalization to express that a large number of the believers left Jerusalem because of the persecution. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
654	8:1	k5a2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	This statement implies that the apostles remained in Jerusalem even though they also experienced this great persecution. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
655	8:2	sjc8			ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς	1	“God-fearing men” or “Men who feared God”
656	8:2	a38x			ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ	1	“greatly mourned his death”
657	8:3	nz28			σύρων τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας	1	Saul forcefully took Jewish believers out of their home and put them into prison.
658	8:3	yd2i			κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους	1	“houses one by one”
659	8:3	ylr6			σύρων τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας	1	“took away men and women by force”
660	8:3	w6vk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας	1	This refers to men and women who believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
661	8:4	dh3x				0	This begins the story of Philip, whom the people had chosen as a deacon (Acts 6:5).
662	8:4	ymy5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διασπαρέντες	1	The cause for the scattering, the persecution, was stated previously. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “who had fled the great persecution and had gone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
663	8:4	su6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	This is a metonym for “the message.” You may need to make explicit that the message was about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
664	8:5	gz5m			κατελθὼν εἰς τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας	1	The phrase “went down” is used here because Samaria is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
665	8:5	f45b			τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας	1	Possible meanings are (1) Luke expected the readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” or (2) Luke did not expect his readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: “a city in Samaria”
666	8:5	pk1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκήρυσσεν αὐτοῖς τὸν Χριστόν	1	The title “Christ” refers to Jesus, the Messiah. Alternate translation: “told them that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
667	8:6	cnt9			δὲ οἱ ὄχλοι	1	“When many people in the city of Samaria.” The location was specified in Acts 8:5.
668	8:6	wm83			προσεῖχον	1	The reason people paid attention was because of all the healing Philip did.
669	8:7	xb2n			ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα	1	“who had them” or “who were controlled by unclean spirits”
670	8:8	z5z3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐγένετο δὲ πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	The phrase “that city” refers to the people who were rejoicing. Alternate translation: “So the people of the city were rejoicing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
671	8:9	jm7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse gives the beginning of the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
672	8:9	bed1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων	1	This is a way of introducing a new person into the story. Your language may use different wording to introduce a new person into the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
673	8:9	cx7a			τῇ πόλει	1	“the city in Samaria” (Acts 8:5)
674	8:10	kb9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse continues to give the beginning of the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
675	8:10	evt7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες	1	The word “all” is a generalization. Alternate translation: “Many of the Samaritans” or “The Samaritans in the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
676	8:10	ibl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου	1	These two phrases refer to everyone from one extreme to the other. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
677	8:10	j3d8			οὗτός ἐστιν ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη	1	People were saying that Simon was the divine power known as “The Great Power.”
678	8:10	yw5v			ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη	1	Possible meanings are (1) the powerful representative of God or (2) God or (3) the most powerful man or (4) and angel. Since the term is unclear, it may be best to simply translate it as “the Great power of God” .
679	8:11	pxj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse ends the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
680	8:12	yiw3				0	These verses give more information about Simon and some of the Samaritans coming to believe in Jesus.
681	8:12	vsy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized them” or “Philip baptized the new believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
682	8:13	k2th		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὁ & Σίμων & αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν	1	The word “himself” is here used to emphasize that Simon believed. Alternate translation: “Simon was also one of those who believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
683	8:13	v91t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βαπτισθεὶς	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized Simon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
684	8:13	aj93			θεωρῶν τε σημεῖα	1	This could begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “When he saw”
685	8:14	q8wx				0	Luke continues the news of what was happening in Samaria.
686	8:14	s7lr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἀκούσαντες δὲ οἱ ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις ἀπόστολοι	1	This marks the beginning of a new part of the story of the Samaritan’s becoming believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
687	8:14	ju21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἡ Σαμάρεια	1	This refers to the many people, who had become believers, throughout the district of Samaria. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
688	8:14	e682			δέδεκται	1	“had believed” or “had accepted”
689	8:15	af1n			οἵτινες καταβάντες	1	“when Peter and John had come down”
690	8:15	hk1m			καταβάντες	1	This phrase is used here because Samaria is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
691	8:15	bun9			προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν	1	“Peter and John prayed for the Samaritan believers”
692	8:15	n7vc			ὅπως λάβωσιν Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον	1	“that the Samaritan believers might receive the Holy Spirit”
693	8:16	m1nw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
694	8:16	rn3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here “name” represents authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
695	8:17	fwh8			ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	Peter and John placed their hands on the Samaritan people who had believed Stephen’s message of the gospel.
696	8:17	q7gd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	This symbolic action shows that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to the believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
697	8:18	rh79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles gave the Holy Spirit by laying their hands on people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
698	8:19	fbw9			ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον	1	“that I can give the Holy Spirit to anyone on whom I place my hands”
699	8:20	df1j				0	Here the words him, your, you, and yours all refer to Simon.
700	8:20	jju3			τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	“May you and your money be destroyed”
701	8:20	gh12			τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here this refers to the ability to give the Holy Spirit by laying his hands on someone.
702	8:21	p2ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	The words “part” and “share” mean the same thing and are used for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You may not participate in this work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
703	8:21	xbh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα	1	Here “heart” is a metonym for a person’s thoughts or motives. Alternate translation: “you are not right in your heart” or “the motives of your mind are not right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
704	8:22	ppk5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	Here “heart” is a metonym for a person’s thoughts. Alternate translation: “for what you intended to do” or “for what you were thinking of doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
705	8:22	sa6s			τῆς κακίας & ταύτης	1	“these evil thoughts”
706	8:22	pe2u			εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί	1	“he may be willing to forgive”
707	8:23	d3v7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας	1	Here “in the poison of bitterness” is a metaphor for being very envious. It speaks of envy as if it tastes bitter and poisons the person who is envious. Alternate translation: “very envious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
708	8:23	j696		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας	1	The phrase “bonds of sin” is spoken of as if sin can restrain Simon and keep him a prisoner. It is metaphor that means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “because you continue sinning you are like a prisoner” or “you are like a prisoner to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
709	8:24	n5cw				0	Here the word “you” refers to Peter and John.
710	8:24	u1a4			ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ	1	This can be stated another way. Alternate translation: “the things you have said … may not happen to me”
711	8:24	sk5w			ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ	1	This refers to Peter’s rebuke about Simon’s silver perishing along with him.
712	8:25	dl9f				0	This is concludes the part of the story about Simon and the Samaritans.
713	8:25	uz15			διαμαρτυράμενοι	1	Peter and John told what they personally knew about Jesus to the Samaritans.
714	8:25	ww9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	“Word” here is a metonym for “message.” Peter and John explained the message about Jesus to the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
715	8:25	eu66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πολλάς & κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν	1	Here “villages” refers to the people in them. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
716	8:26	zkc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Verse 27 gives background information about the man from Ethiopia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
717	8:26	rnh4				0	This begins the part of the story about Philip and the man from Ethiopia.
718	8:26	mbj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	This marks a transition in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
719	8:26	w1nk			ἀνάστηθι καὶ πορεύου	1	These verbs work together to emphasize that he should get ready to start a long journey that will take some time. Alternate translation: “Get ready to travel”
720	8:26	le2c			τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν	1	The phrase “goes down” is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Gaza.
721	8:26	a18y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος	1	Most scholars believe Luke added this comment to describe the area through which Philip would travel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
722	8:27	xy7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἰδοὺ	1	The word “behold” alerts us to a new person in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
723	8:27	s1uf			εὐνοῦχος	1	The emphasis of “eunuch” here is about the Ethiopian’s being a high government official, not so much his physical state of being castrated.
724	8:27	t5t1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κανδάκης	1	This was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the way the word Pharaoh was used for the kings of Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
725	8:27	v8q7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	This implies that he was a Gentile who believed in God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. Alternate translation: “He had come to worship God at the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
726	8:28	d3kv			τοῦ ἅρματος	1	Possibly “wagon” or “carriage” is more fitting in this context. Chariots are normally mentioned as a vehicle for war, not as a vehicle for long-distance travel. Also, people stood to ride in chariots.
727	8:28	bx2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν	1	This is the Old Testament book Isaiah. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
728	8:29	llh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ	1	Philip understood that this meant he was to stay close to the person riding in the chariot. Alternate translation: “accompany the man in this chariot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
729	8:30	ffh7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην	1	This is the Old Testament book Isaiah. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
730	8:30	x98i			ἆρά & γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις	1	The Ethiopian was intelligent and could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?”
731	8:31	r5g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς & δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με	1	This question was asked to state emphatically that he could not understand without help. Alternate translation: “I cannot understand unless someone guides me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
732	8:31	zx9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρεκάλεσέν & τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ	1	It is implied here that Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the scriptures. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
733	8:32	nd93				0	This a passage from the book of Isaiah. Here the words “he” and “his” refer to the Messiah.
734	8:32	lu3j			ὡς ἀμνὸς ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος	1	A shearer is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used.
735	8:33	y2a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει, ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “He was humiliated and they did not judge him fairly” or “he allowed himself to be humbled before his accusers and he suffered injustice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
736	8:33	k3uz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται	1	This question was used to emphasize the he will not have descendants. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to speak about his descendant, for there will not be any” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
737	8:33	idk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ	1	This referred to his death. It can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “men killed him” or “men took his life from the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
738	8:34	htb2			δέομαί σου	1	“Please tell me”
739	8:35	uw21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης	1	This refers to Isaiah’s writings in the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “in the writings of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
740	8:36	ip13			ἐπορεύοντο κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν	1	“they continued to travel along the road”
741	8:36	muz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι	1	The eunuch uses this question as a way of asking Philip for permission to be baptized. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
742	8:38	l8wl			ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα	1	“the eunich told the driver of the chariot to stop”
743	8:39	tz5u				0	This is the end of the part of the story about Philip and the man from Ethiopia. The story of Philip ends at Caesarea.
744	8:39	xp52			οὐκ εἶδεν αὐτὸν οὐκέτι ὁ εὐνοῦχος	1	“the eunuch did not see Philip again”
745	8:40	r1x7			Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον	1	There was no indication of Philip’s traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He just suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus.
746	8:40	arh5			διερχόμενος	1	This refers to the area around the town of Azotus.
747	8:40	zfn6			τὰς πόλεις πάσας	1	“to all the cities in that region”
748	9:intro	jm6x				0	Acts 09 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter “The Way” No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus” The “letters” Paul asked for were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter What Saul saw when he met Jesus It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here.
749	9:1	r4n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	These verses give background information telling us what Saul has been doing since the stoning of Stephen. Here the word “him” refers to the high priest and “he” refers to Saul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
750	9:1	yt9e				0	The story shifts back to Saul and his salvation.
751	9:1	anb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔτι ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς τοὺς μαθητὰς	1	The noun “murder” can be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: “still speaking threats, even to murder the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
752	9:2	v9lw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς	1	This refers to the people in the synagogues. Alternate translation: “for the people in the synagogues” or “for the leaders in the synagogues” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
753	9:2	y8f6			ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ	1	“when he found anyone” or “if he found anyone”
754	9:2	pk19			τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας	1	“who followed the teachings of Jesus Christ”
755	9:2	n94s			τῆς ὁδοῦ	1	This term appears to have been a title for Christianity at that time.
756	9:2	a6z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	“he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem.” Paul’s purpose can be made clear by adding “so that the Jewish leaders could judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
757	9:3	lv9q				0	After the high priest gave Saul the letters, Saul left for Damascus.
758	9:3	jf4g			ἐν & τῷ πορεύεσθαι	1	Saul left Jerusalem and now travels to Damascus.
759	9:3	by55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο	1	This is an expression that marks a change in the story to show something different is about to happen. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
760	9:3	dm6c			τε αὐτὸν περιήστραψεν φῶς ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	“a light from heaven shone all around him”
761	9:3	gua8			ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	Possible meanings are (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it.
762	9:4	y4u4			πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν	1	Possible meanings are that (1) “Saul threw himself to the ground” or (2) “The light caused him to fall to the ground” or (3) “Saul fell to the ground the way one who fainted fell.” Saul did not fall accidentally.
763	9:4	c9l4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί με διώκεις	1	This rhetorical question communicates a rebuke to Saul. In some languages a statement would be more natural (AT): “You are persecuting me!” or a command (AT): “Stop persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
764	9:5	q8ge				0	Every occurrence of the word “you” here is singular.
765	9:5	jaq2			τίς εἶ, κύριε	1	Saul was not acknowledging that Jesus is the Lord. He uses that title because he understood that he spoke to someone of supernatural power.
766	9:5	abc0			ὁ	1	Jesus is speaking.
767	9:6	i1kj			ἀλλὰ ἀνάστηθι καὶ εἴσελθε εἰς τὴν πόλιν	1	“get up and go into the city Damascus”
768	9:6	fbi6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λαληθήσεταί σοι	1	This can be stated in the active form. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
769	9:7	xu7c			ἀκούοντες μὲν τῆς φωνῆς, μηδένα δὲ θεωροῦντες	1	“they heard the voice, but they did not see anyone”
770	9:7	f9fe			μηδένα δὲ θεωροῦντες	1	“but saw no one.” Apparently only Saul experienced the light.
771	9:8	puw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνεῳγμένων & τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ	1	This implies that he had closed his eyes because the light was too bright. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
772	9:8	dgg8			οὐδὲν ἔβλεπεν	1	“he could not see anything.” Saul was blind.
773	9:9	fhn6			ἦν & μὴ βλέπων	1	“was blind” or “could not see anything”
774	9:9	t8uc			οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν	1	It is not stated whether he chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship, or if he had no appetite because he was too distressed from his situation. It is preferable not to specify the reason.
775	9:10	kgn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names		0	The story of Saul continues but Luke introduces another man named Ananias. This is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts Acts 5:3. You may translate this name the same way though as you did in Acts 5:1. Though there is more than one Judas mentioned in the New Testament, it is likely this is the only appearance of this Judas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
776	9:10	j847		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἦν δέ	1	This introduces Ananias as a new character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
777	9:10	vl8k			ὁ & εἶπεν	1	“Ananias said”
778	9:11	mn24			πορεύθητι ἐπὶ τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν	1	“go to Straight Street”
779	9:11	ie1l			οἰκίᾳ Ἰούδα	1	This Judas is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus. This Judas was owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying.
780	9:11	u5j8			Σαῦλον ὀνόματι Ταρσέα	1	“a man from the city of Tarsus named Saul” or “Saul of Tarsus”
781	9:12	jk46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας	1	This was a symbol of giving a spiritual blessing to Saul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
782	9:12	nx5q			ἀναβλέψῃ	1	“he might regain his ability to see”
783	9:13	la9t			ἁγίοις σου	1	Here “holy people” refers to Christians. Alternate translation: “the people in Jerusalem who believe in you”
784	9:14	ptd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὧδε & ἐξουσίαν & δῆσαι πάντας	1	It is implied that the extent of the power and authority granted Saul was limited to the Jewish people at this point in time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
785	9:14	t3fl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1	Here “your name” refers to Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
786	9:15	jmt7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς ἐστίν μοι οὗτος	1	“chosen instrument” refers to something that is set apart for service. Alternate translation: “I have chosen him to serve me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
787	9:15	z5fj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	This is an expression for identifying or speaking out for Jesus. Alternate translation: “in order that he might speak about me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
788	9:16	kty3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου	1	This is an expression meaning “for telling people about me.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
789	9:17	q61x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	The word “you” here is singular and refers to Saul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
790	9:17	j2pf				0	Ananias goes to the house where Saul is staying. After Saul is healed, the story shifts from Ananias back to Saul.
791	9:17	s8ms			ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν	1	It may be helpful to state that Ananias went to the house before he entered into it. Alternate translation: “So Ananias went, and after he found the house where Saul was, he entered it”
792	9:17	my6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	Ananias put his hands on Saul. This was a symbol of giving a blessing to Saul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
793	9:17	a89q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅπως ἀναβλέψῃς καὶ πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “has sent me so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
794	9:18	m1hx			ἀπέπεσαν & ὡς λεπίδες	1	“something that appeared like fish scales fell”
795	9:18	g2ea			ἀνέβλεψέν	1	“he was able to see again”
796	9:18	efs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναστὰς ἐβαπτίσθη	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he got up and Ananias baptized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
797	9:20	rc49				0	Here only the second “he” refers to Jesus, the Son of God. The first “he” and the other ones refer to Saul.
798	9:20	w65r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
799	9:21	xid8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες	1	The word “All” is a generalization. Alternate translation: “Those who heard him” or “Many who heard him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
800	9:21	f4fd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	This is a rhetorical and negative question that emphasizes that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who called on this name Jesus!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
801	9:21	ctg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	Here “name” refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
802	9:22	r1np			συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους	1	They were distressed in the sense that they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Christ.
803	9:23	g6gw				0	The word “him” in this section refers to Saul.
804	9:23	g74c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	This refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
805	9:24	lv62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “But someone told their plan to Saul” or “But Saul learned about their plan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
806	9:24	cy9n			παρετηροῦντο & καὶ τὰς πύλας	1	This city had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through the gates.
807	9:25	lc8m			οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1	people who believed Saul’s message about Jesus and were following his teaching
808	9:25	u8g8			διὰ τοῦ τείχους, καθῆκαν αὐτὸν, χαλάσαντες ἐν σπυρίδι	1	“used ropes to lower him in a large basket through an opening in the wall”
809	9:26	j1el				0	Here the words “he” and “him” refer to Saul all but one time. “And ‘he’ told them how” in verse 27 refers to Barnabas.
810	9:26	e38m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	καὶ πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν	1	Here “they were all” is a generalization, but it is possible that it refers to every person. Alternate translation: “but they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
811	9:27	abca			διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς	1	“Barnabas told the apostles”
812	9:27	abcb			εἶδεν	1	“Saul had seen”
813	9:27	abcc			ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ	1	“the Lord had spoken to Saul”
814	9:27	n9f1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπαρρησιάσατο ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	This is a way of saying he preached or taught the gospel message of Jesus Christ without fear. Alternate translation: “had openly preached the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
815	9:28	m5rs			ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	Here the word “He” refers to Paul. The word “them” probably refers to the apostles and other disciples in Jerusalem.
816	9:28	fbb7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Possible meanings are (1) this simply refers to the Lord Jesus and tells who Paul spoke about. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” or (2) “name” is a metonym for authority. Alternate translation: “under the authority of the Lord Jesus” or “with the authority that the Lord Jesus gave him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
817	9:29	d7lm			συνεζήτει πρὸς τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς	1	Saul tried to reason with the Jews who spoke Greek.
818	9:30	uz9a			οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	The words “the brothers” refers to the believers in Jerusalem.
819	9:30	j4mt			κατήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	The phrase “brought him down” is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
820	9:30	aqn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν εἰς Ταρσόν	1	Caesarea was a seaport. They brothers probably sent Saul to Tarsus by ship. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
821	9:31	vk8y				0	Verse 31 is a statement that gives an update on the church’s growth.
822	9:31	n7c5				0	In verse 32, the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter.
823	9:31	s4bn			ἡ & ἐκκλησία καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας, καὶ Γαλιλαίας, καὶ Σαμαρείας	1	This is the first use of the singular “church” to refer to more than one local congregation. Here it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Israel.
824	9:31	fh2g			εἶχεν εἰρήνην	1	“lived peacefully.” This means the persecution that started with the murder of Stephen was finished.
825	9:31	elq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἰκοδομουμένη	1	The agent was either God or the Holy Spirit. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God helped them grow” or “the Holy Spirit built them up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
826	9:31	j8c9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	“Walking” here is a metaphor for “living.” Alternate translation: “living in obedience to the Lord” or “continuing to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
827	9:31	hl24			τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	“with the Holy Spirit strengthening and encouraging them”
828	9:32	w68g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	This phrase is used to mark a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
829	9:32	m9sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	διὰ πάντων	1	This is an generalization for Peter’s visiting the believers in many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
830	9:32	ad7g			κατελθεῖν	1	The phrase “came down” is used here because Lydda is lower in elevation than the other places where he was traveling.
831	9:32	g5c4			Λύδδα	1	Lydda is a city located about 18 kilometers southeast of Joppa. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and in modern Israel.
832	9:33	hzd7			εὗρεν & ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα	1	Peter was not intentionally searching for a paralyzed person, but happened upon him. Alternate translation: “There Peter met a man”
833	9:33	jnc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν	1	This introduces Aeneas as a new character in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
834	9:33	uj5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος	1	This is background information about Aeneas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
835	9:33	k7hw			παραλελυμένος	1	unable to walk, probably unable to move below the waist
836	9:34	ff2a			στρῶσον σεαυτῷ	1	“roll up your mat”
837	9:35	z3fp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα	1	This is a generalization referring to many of the people there. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon” or “many people who lived in Lydda and Sharon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
838	9:35	qkv4			Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα	1	The city of Lydda was located in the Plain of Sharon.
839	9:35	pf23			εἶδαν αὐτὸν	1	It may be helpful to state that they saw that the man was healed. Alternate translation: “saw the man whom Peter had healed”
840	9:35	x9yw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	Here “turned to the Lord” is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
841	9:36	gy8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	These verses give background information about the woman named Tabitha. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
842	9:36	du3s				0	Luke continues the story with a new event about Peter.
843	9:36	zgq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δέ & ἦν	1	This introduces a new part in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
844	9:36	gwr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται, Δορκάς	1	Tabitha is her name in the Aramaic language, and Dorcas is her name in the Greek language. Both names mean “gazelle.” Alternate translation: “Her name in the Greek language was Dorcas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
845	9:36	q2rn			πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν	1	“doing many good things”
846	9:37	mg72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	This refers to the time when Peter was in Joppa. This can be stated. Alternate translation: “It came about while Peter was nearby” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
847	9:37	y8sx			λούσαντες & αὐτὴν	1	This was washing to prepare for her burial.
848	9:37	znj4			ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ	1	This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process.
849	9:38	uhz5			ἀπέστειλαν δύο ἄνδρας πρὸς αὐτὸν	1	“the disciples sent two men to Peter”
850	9:39	k1se			εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον	1	“to the upstairs room where Dorcas’ body was lying”
851	9:39	me79			πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι	1	It is possible that all the widows of the town were there since it was not a large town.
852	9:39	piu7			χῆραι	1	women whose husbands had died and therefore needed help
853	9:39	y6q5			μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα	1	“while she was still alive with the disciples”
854	9:40	ek9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	The story of Tabitha ends in verse 42. Verse 43 tells us what happens to Peter after the story ends. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
855	9:40	yp2u			ἐκβαλὼν & ἔξω πάντας	1	“told them all to leave the room.” Peter had everyone leave so he could be alone to pray for Tabitha.
856	9:41	r7n6			δοὺς & αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν	1	Peter took hold of her hand and helped her stand up.
857	9:41	b73s			τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας	1	The widows were possibly also believers but are mentioned specifically because Tabitha was so important to them.
858	9:42	nda9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης	1	This refers to the miracle of Peter’s raising Tabitha from the dead. It can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
859	9:42	fyz4			ἐπίστευσαν & ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	“believed in the gospel of the Lord Jesus”
860	9:43	k9ik		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο	1	“It came about that.” This introduces the beginning of the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
861	9:43	qar2			Σίμωνι, βυρσεῖ	1	“a man named Simon who made leather from animal skins”
862	10:intro	ym7z				0	Acts 10 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Unclean The Jews believed that they could become unclean in God’s sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against it because they wanted to keep people from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that God’s people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) Baptism and the Holy Spirit The Holy Spirit “fell on” those who were listening to Peter. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could receive the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.
863	10:1	m1vx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	These verses give background information about Cornelius. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
864	10:1	nfy5				0	This is the beginning of the part of the story about Cornelius.
865	10:1	wtb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἀνὴρ δέ τις	1	This was a way of introducing a new person to this part of the historical account. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
866	10:1	x476			ὀνόματι Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἐκ Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς	1	“his name was Cornelius. He was an officer in charge of 100 soldiers from the Italian section of the Roman army.
867	10:1	abcd			Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς	1	“the Italian Regiment”
868	10:2	s6rh			εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	“He believed in God and sought to honor and worship God in his life”
869	10:2	n8i3			φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	The word for “worshiped” here has the sense of deep respect and awe.
870	10:2	abce			τῷ λαῷ	1	This here refers to Jewish people who were in need.
871	10:2	w2kx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	δεόμενος τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ παντός	1	The word “constantly” is a generalization. Alternate translation: “he prayed to God a lot” or “he prayed to God regularly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
872	10:3	up3j			ὥραν ἐνάτην	1	“three o’clock in the afternoon.” This is the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews.
873	10:3	g3lv			εἶδεν & φανερῶς	1	“Cornelius clearly saw”
874	10:4	abcf			ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ	1	Cornelius looked intently at the angel.
875	10:4	abcg			εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ	1	“Then the angel said to Cornelius”
876	10:4	p5ml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	It is implied that his gifts and prayers had been accepted by God. Alternate translation: “God is pleased by your prayers and your gifts … a memorial offering to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
877	10:6	lt9n			βυρσεῖ	1	a person who makes leather from animal skins
878	10:7	g6lq			ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ	1	“When Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended.”
879	10:7	i3x7			στρατιώτην εὐσεβῆ τῶν προσκαρτερούντων αὐτῷ	1	“one of the soldiers who served him, who also worshiped God.” This soldier worshiped God. That was rare in the Roman army, so Cornelius’ other soldiers probably did not worship God.
880	10:7	yg7g			εὐσεβῆ	1	An adjective to describe a person who worshiped God and served him.
881	10:8	pcg2			ἐξηγησάμενος ἅπαντα αὐτοῖς	1	Cornelius explained his vision to his two servants and to one of his soldiers.
882	10:8	d2p3			ἀπέστειλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν Ἰόππην	1	“sent two of his two servants and the one soldier to Joppa.”
883	10:9	ey9n				0	Here the word “they” refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command (Acts 10:7).
884	10:9	w3g4				0	The story shifts away from Cornelius to tell us what God is doing with to Peter.
885	10:9	tu7n			περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην	1	“around noon”
886	10:9	r6l8			ἀνέβη & ἐπὶ τὸ δῶμα	1	The roofs of the houses were flat, and people often did many different activities on them.
887	10:10	slq7			παρασκευαζόντων & αὐτῶν	1	“before the people finished cooking the food”
888	10:10	im7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις	1	“God gave him a vision” or “he saw a vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
889	10:11	n4hi			θεωρεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον	1	This was the beginning of Peter’s vision. It can be a new sentence.
890	10:11	u9u4			ὡς ὀθόνην μεγάλην, τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς	1	The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth.
891	10:11	jh1m			τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς καθιέμενον	1	“with its four corners suspended” or “with its four corners higher than the rest of it”
892	10:12	ua3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντα τὰ τετράποδα, καὶ ἑρπετὰ τῆς γῆς, καὶ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	From Peter’s response in the next verse, it can be implied that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of them. Alternate translation: “animals and birds that the Mosaic laws forbade Jews to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
893	10:13	a2z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν	1	The person speaking is not specified. The “voice” was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
894	10:14	z7r5			μηδαμῶς	1	“I will not do that”
895	10:14	a2jj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1	It is implied that some the animals in the container were unclean as defined by the law of Moses and were not to be eaten by believers who lived before Christ died. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
896	10:15	xs5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν	1	If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
897	10:16	rlr9			τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	It is not likely that everything Peter saw happened three times. This probably means that the phrase, “What God has cleansed, do not call it defiled,” was repeated three times. However, it may be best to simply say “This happened three times” instead of trying to explain in detail.
898	10:17	d4zi			διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος	1	This means that Peter was having difficulty understanding what the vision meant.
899	10:17	n6da			ἰδοὺ	1	The word “behold” here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows, in this case, the two men standing at the gate.
900	10:17	e62m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα	1	“stood before the gate to the house.” It is implied that this house had a wall with a gate in it to enter the property. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
901	10:17	h72m			διερωτήσαντες τὴν οἰκίαν	1	This happened before they arrived at the house. This could be stated earlier in the verse, as the UST does.
902	10:18	qe9d			φωνήσαντες	1	Cornelius’ men remained outside the gate while asking about Peter.
903	10:19	e8ai			διενθυμουμένου περὶ τοῦ ὁράματος	1	“wondering about the meaning of the vision”
904	10:19	d9q8			τὸ Πνεῦμα	1	“the Holy Spirit”
905	10:19	iqx5			ἰδοὺ	1	“Pay attention, because what I am about to say is both true and important: three”
906	10:19	va39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἄνδρες τρεῖς ζητοῦσιν σε	1	Cornelius sent two of his servants and one soldier. Some ancient texts have a different number of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
907	10:20	ym1x			κατάβηθι	1	“go down from the roof of the house”
908	10:20	wx4n			πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς, μηδὲν διακρινόμενος	1	It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with them, because they were strangers and they were Gentiles.
909	10:21	lj1f			ἐγώ εἰμι ὃν ζητεῖτε	1	“I am the man you are looking for”
910	10:22	i4zh				0	The words “They” and “them” here refer to the two servants and the soldier from Cornelius (Acts 10:7).
911	10:22	baa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ	1	This can be divided into several sentences and stated in active form as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
912	10:22	wvl1			φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	The word for “worship” here has the sense of deep respect and awe.
913	10:22	gv91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	This number of people is exaggerated with the word “all” to emphasize how widely this was known among the Jews. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
914	10:23	jlc7			εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν	1	The journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon.
915	10:23	shs5			ἐξένισεν	1	“be his guests”
916	10:23	t7cz			τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν τῶν ἀπὸ Ἰόππης	1	This refers to believers who lived in Joppa.
917	10:24	c3s6			τῇ & ἐπαύριον	1	This was the next day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day.
918	10:24	g2up			ὁ δὲ Κορνήλιος ἦν προσδοκῶν αὐτοὺς	1	“Cornelius expected them”
919	10:25	wxt8			ὡς & τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον	1	“when Peter entered the house”
920	10:25	b4pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας, προσεκύνησεν	1	“he knelt down and put his face close to Peter’s feet.” He did this to honor Peter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
921	10:25	u2x5			πεσὼν	1	He purposely lies down facing the ground to show that he is worshiping.
922	10:26	s7n5			ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ & ἄνθρωπός εἰμι	1	This was a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius not to worship Peter. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are”
923	10:27	f9x6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	The word “him” here refers to Cornelius. Here the words “You” and “you” are plural and include Cornelius as well as the Gentiles who were present. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
924	10:27	bg7b				0	Peter addresses the people who are gathered in Cornelius’ house.
925	10:27	twp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	συνεληλυθότας πολλούς	1	“many Gentile people gathered together.” It is implied that these people Cornelius had invited were Gentiles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
926	10:28	g7j7			ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε	1	Peter is addressing Cornelius and his invited guests.
927	10:28	iyx6			ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ	1	“it is forbidden for a Jewish man.” This refers to the Jewish religious law.
928	10:28	k3we			ἀλλοφύλῳ	1	This refers to people who were not Jews and not specifically to where they lived.
929	10:30	krz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	In verses 31 and 32 Cornelius quotes what the angel had said to him when he appeared to him at the ninth hour. The words “you” and “your” are all singular. The word “we” here does not include Peter. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
930	10:30	n5fs				0	Cornelius responds to Peter’s question.
931	10:30	na4u			ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας	1	Cornelius is referring to the day before the third night before he is speaking to Peter. Biblical culture counts the current day, so the day before three nights ago is “four days ago.” Current Western culture does not count the current day, so many Western translations read, “three days ago.”
932	10:30	mqv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	προσευχόμενος	1	Some ancient authorities say “fasting and praying” instead of simply “praying.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
933	10:30	yy6e			τὴν ἐνάτην	1	The normal afternoon time that the Jews pray to God.
934	10:31	heh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
935	10:31	s6nz			ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	“brought you to God’s attention.” This does not imply that God had forgotten.
936	10:32	ci31			μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος	1	“tell Simon who is also called Peter to come to you”
937	10:33	p5ee			ἐξαυτῆς	1	“right away”
938	10:33	ruf3			σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος	1	This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “I certainly thank you for coming”
939	10:33	ry21			ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This refers to the presence of God.
940	10:33	xt4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that the Lord has told you to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
941	10:34	ku8u				0	Peter begins speaking to everyone in the house of Cornelius.
942	10:34	cyn8			ἀνοίξας δὲ Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν	1	“Peter began to speak to them”
943	10:34	ha31			ἐπ’ ἀληθείας	1	This means that what he is about to say is especially important to know.
944	10:34	iii7			οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ὁ Θεός	1	“God does not favor certain people”
945	10:35	j78e			ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην, δεκτὸς αὐτῷ ἐστιν	1	“he accepts anyone who worships him and does righteous deeds”
946	10:35	b5cr			φοβούμενος	1	The word “worships” here has the sense of deep respect and awe.
947	10:36	bjk7				0	The word “him” here refers to Jesus.
948	10:36	sv4s				0	Peter continues to talk to Cornelius and his guests.
949	10:36	md1l			οὗτός ἐστιν πάντων Κύριος	1	Here “all” means “all people.”
950	10:37	ch65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	The word “all” is a generalization. Alternate translation: “throughout Judea” or “in many places in Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
951	10:37	sq2i			μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης	1	“after John preached to the people to repent and then baptized them”
952	10:38	jtr3			Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει	1	This long sentence, which begins in verse 36, can be shortened into several sentences as in the UST. “You know … of all. You yourselves know … announced. You know the events … with power”
953	10:38	ku82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει	1	The Holy Spirit and God’s power are spoken of as if they are something that can be poured out onto a person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
954	10:38	y5ya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου	1	The word “all” is a generalization. Alternate translation: “those who were oppressed by the devil” or “many people who were oppressed by the devil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
955	10:38	tj3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	The idiom “was with him” means “was helping him.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
956	10:39	kal7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The words “We” and “we” here refer to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth. The words “he” and “him” here refer to Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
957	10:39	sx3a			ἔν & τῇ χώρᾳ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	This refers mainly to Judea at that time.
958	10:39	z4dt			κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	This is another expression that refers to crucifixion. Alternate translation: “nailing him to a wooden cross”
959	10:40	cxj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
960	10:40	w8kv			τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ	1	“the third day after he died”
961	10:40	iz8l			ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι	1	“permitted many people to see him after he was raised from the dead”
962	10:41	q7d1			ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld.
963	10:42	ik96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “us” includes Peter and believers. It excludes his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
964	10:42	zne5				0	Peter finishes his speech to everyone in the house of Cornelius, which he began in Acts 10:34.
965	10:42	c1ak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that God chose this Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
966	10:42	ws4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν	1	This refers to people who are still living and people who have died. Alternate translation: “the people who are alive and the people who are dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
967	10:43	ub5d			τούτῳ πάντες οἱ προφῆται μαρτυροῦσιν	1	“All the prophets bear witness to Jesus”
968	10:43	vq6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν & πάντα τὸν πιστεύοντα εἰς αὐτὸν	1	This could be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will forgive the sins of everyone who believes in Jesus because of what Jesus has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
969	10:43	y6d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	Here “his name” refers to the actions of Jesus. His name means God who saves. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
970	10:44	cz7x			ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	Here the word “fell” means “happened suddenly.” Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit suddenly came”
971	10:44	wf7u			πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας	1	Here “all” refers to all the Gentiles at the house who were listening to Peter.
972	10:45	j6wt			ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	This refers to the Holy Spirit himself who was given to them.
973	10:45	g161		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God poured out the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
974	10:45	mqs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκκέχυται	1	The Holy Spirit is spoken of as if he were something that could be poured out upon people. It implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “generously given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
975	10:45	je22			ἡ δωρεὰ	1	“the free gift”
976	10:45	f33n			καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη	1	Here “also” refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers.
977	10:46	w58d				0	The words “he” and “him” refer to Peter.
978	10:46	mpg5				0	This is the end of the part of the story about Cornelius.
979	10:46	p6pa			αὐτῶν λαλούντων γλώσσαις, καὶ μεγαλυνόντων τὸν Θεόν	1	These were known spoken languages that caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Gentiles were indeed praising God.
980	10:47	u5d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς	1	Peter uses this question to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. Alternate translation: “No one should keep water from these people! We should baptize them because they have received … we!” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
981	10:48	t2y9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι	1	It is implied that the Jewish Christians were the ones who would baptize them. Alternate translation: “Peter commanded the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them” or “Peter commanded the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
982	10:48	ax6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι	1	Here “in the name of Jesus Christ” expresses that the reason for their baptism was that they believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “be baptized as believers in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
983	11:intro	hva5				0	Acts 11 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter “The Gentiles also had received the word of God” Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.
984	11:1	uw5m				0	This is the beginning of a new event in the story.
985	11:1	j7f7				0	Peter arrives in Jerusalem and begins talking to the Jews there.
986	11:1	ab75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	This marks a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
987	11:1	f1md			οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ	1	The phrase “brothers” here refers to the believers in Judea.
988	11:1	q8wl			οἱ ὄντες κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν	1	“who were in the province of Judea”
989	11:1	w3rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This expression refers to the fact that the Gentiles believed the gospel message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “believed the message of God about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
990	11:2	kb4m			ἀνέβη & εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of coming up to Jerusalem and going down from it.
991	11:2	yar6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς	1	This is a reference to some of the Jews who believed that every believer must be circumcised. Alternate translation: “some Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted all followers of Christ to be circumcized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
992	11:3	ah7v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας	1	The phrase “uncircumcised men” refers to Gentiles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
993	11:3	t9e1			συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς	1	It was against Jewish tradition for Jews to eat with Gentiles.
994	11:4	lrh6				0	Peter responds to the Jews by telling them about his vision and about what had happened at Cornelius’ house.
995	11:4	bfp5			ἀρξάμενος & Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο	1	Peter did not criticize the Jewish believers but reacted in a friendly explanatory manner.
996	11:4	nuy6			καθεξῆς	1	“exactly what happened”
997	11:5	j37p			ὡς ὀθόνην μεγάλην	1	The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth. See how you translated this in Acts 10:11.
998	11:5	axu6			τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς	1	“with its four corners suspended” or “with its four corners higher than the rest of it.” See how you translated this in Acts 10:11.
999	11:6	lbh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τετράποδα τῆς γῆς	1	From Peter’s response, it can be implied that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of them. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 10:12. Alternate translation: “animals and birds that the Mosaic laws forbade Jews to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1000	11:6	ew64			θηρία	1	This probably refer to the animals people do not or can not tame or control.
1001	11:6	t36i			ἑρπετὰ	1	These are reptiles.
1002	11:7	i5ic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἤκουσα & φωνῆς	1	The person speaking is not specified. The “voice” was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. See how you translated “a voice” in Acts 10:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1003	11:8	m4mu			μηδαμῶς	1	“I will not do that.” See how you translated this in Acts 10:14.
1004	11:8	m5p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου	1	Apparently the animals in the sheet were animals which the Jewish law in the Old Testament forbade the Jews to eat. This can be said in a positive way. Alternate translation: “I have eaten only meat from holy and clean animals” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1005	11:8	kj91			ἀκάθαρτον	1	In the Old Testament Jewish law, a person became ritually “unclean” in various ways, such as eating certain forbidden animals.
1006	11:9	n2gn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν, σὺ μὴ κοίνου	1	This refers to the animals in the sheet. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1007	11:10	xrq6			τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	It is not likely that everything was repeated three times. This probably means that “What God has cleansed, do not call it defiled” was repeated three times. However, it may be best to simply say “This happened three times” instead of trying to explain in detail. See how you translated “This happened three times” in Acts 10:16.
1008	11:11	ias8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “we” refers to Peter and the believers in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1009	11:11	b2qv			ἰδοὺ	1	This word alerts us to the new people in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this.
1010	11:11	k44j			ἐξαυτῆς	1	“immediately” or “at that exact moment”
1011	11:11	qwn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπεσταλμένοι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “someone had sent them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1012	11:12	lf6m			μηδὲν διακρίναντα	1	“that I should not be concerned that they were Gentiles”
1013	11:12	cf8x			ἦλθον & σὺν ἐμοὶ & οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι	1	“These six brothers went with me to Caesarea”
1014	11:12	xrc6			οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι	1	“These six Jewish believers”
1015	11:12	w6ia			εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	This refers to the house of Cornelius.
1016	11:13	few6			Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον	1	“Simon who is also called Peter.” See how you translated the same phrase in Acts 10:32.
1017	11:14	hpr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου	1	This refers to all the people in the household. Alternate translation: “everyone who lives in your house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1018	11:15	qy12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “us” refers to Peter, the apostles, and any of the Jewish believers who had received the Holy Spirit at Pentecost. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1019	11:15	a8jw			ἐν & τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν, ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς	1	This implies that Peter had not finished speaking but had intended to say more.
1020	11:15	ak2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	Peter leaves out some things to keep the story short. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit came on the Gentile believers, just as he came on the Jewish believers at Pentecost” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1021	11:15	th4m			ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	Peter is referring to the day of Pentecost.
1022	11:16	v116		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will baptize you in the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1023	11:17	pe42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “them” refers to Cornelius and his Gentile guests and household. Peter does not call them Gentiles in his account to the Jewish believers at Jerusalem. The word “they” refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter spoke. The word “us” includes all of the Jewish believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1024	11:17	e576				0	Peter finishes his speech (which he began in Acts 11:4) to the Jews about his vision and about what had happened at the house of Cornelius.
1025	11:17	u3nu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	εἰ οὖν τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν	1	Peter uses this question to emphasize that he was only obeying God. Alternate translation: “Since God gave to them … I decided that I could not oppose God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1026	11:17	y7ag			τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν	1	Peter refers to the gift of the Holy Spirit.
1027	11:18	nr7g			ἡσύχασαν	1	“they did not argue with Peter”
1028	11:18	z3fy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν	1	“God has given repentance that leads to life to the Gentiles also.” Here “life” refers to eternal life. The abstract nouns “repentance” and “life” can be translated as the verbs “repent” and “live.” Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles also to repent and live eternally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1029	11:19	zck4				0	Luke tells about what happened to the believers who fled after the stoning of Stephen.
1030	11:19	bwb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	οὖν	1	This introduces the new part of the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1031	11:19	m3i7			οἱ & διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ, διῆλθον	1	The Jews began persecuting Jesus’ followers because Stephen had said and done things that the Jews did not like. Because of this persecution, many of Jesus’ followers left Jerusalem and went to many different places.
1032	11:19	w5jn			οἱ & διῆλθον	1	“those went in many different directions”
1033	11:19	whm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως	1	This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: “whom the Jews had been persecuting and so had left Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1034	11:19	vx4b			τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ	1	the persecution that happened because of what Stephen had said and done
1035	11:19	c8ha			εἰ μὴ μόνον Ἰουδαίοις	1	The believers thought God’s message was for the Jewish people, and not for the Gentiles.
1036	11:20	mww9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλάλουν καὶ πρὸς τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς	1	These Greek-speaking people were Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “also spoke to Gentiles who spoke Greek” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1037	11:21	aj5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἦν χεὶρ Κυρίου μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	God’s hand signifies his powerful help. Alternate translation: “God was powerfully enabling those believers to preach effectively” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1038	11:21	n9pq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	Here “turned to the Lord” is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and began to obey the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1039	11:22	mrg9				0	In these verses, the word “he” refers to Barnabas. The word “they” refers to the believers of the church at Jerusalem. The words “them” and “their” refer to the new believers (Acts 11:20).
1040	11:22	i7vs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	Here “ears” refers to the believers’ hearing about the event. Alternate translation: “the believers in the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1041	11:23	b7w7			ἰδὼν τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	“saw how God acted kindly toward the believers”
1042	11:23	m1q9			παρεκάλει πάντας	1	“he kept on encouraging them”
1043	11:23	qlu4			προσμένειν τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	“to remain faithful to the Lord” or “to continue to trust in the Lord”
1044	11:23	bz6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας	1	Here the “heart” refers to a person’s will and desire. Alternate translation: “with all their will” or “with complete commitment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1045	11:24	he5z			πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	The Holy Spirit controlled Barnabas as he obeyed the Holy Spirit.
1046	11:24	e57t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Here “added” means they came to believe the same thing as the others. Alternate translation: “many more people also believed in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1047	11:25	yhl6				0	Here the word “he” refers to Barnabas and “him” refers to Saul.
1048	11:25	dm92			ἐξῆλθεν & εἰς Ταρσὸν	1	“out to the city of Tarsus”
1049	11:26	hu2g			καὶ εὑρὼν	1	It progably took some time and effort for Barnabas to locate Saul.
1050	11:26	wf5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο	1	This begins a new event in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1051	11:26	w4dz			αὐτοῖς & συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	“Barnabas and Saul gathered together with the church”
1052	11:26	x8gx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	χρηματίσαι & ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ τοὺς μαθητὰς, Χριστιανούς	1	This implies that other people called the believers by this name. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The people of Antioch called the disciples Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1053	11:26	r6sl			πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ	1	“for the first time in Antioch”
1054	11:27	pz7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Here Luke tells background information about a prophecy in Antioch. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1055	11:27	h6zw			δὲ	1	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story-line.
1056	11:27	d8bb			κατῆλθον ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων & εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν	1	Jerusalem was higher in elevation than Antioch, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem or going down from it.
1057	11:28	wyk8			ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος	1	“whose name was Agabus”
1058	11:28	q3tl			ἐσήμανεν διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	“the Holy Spirit enabled him to prophesy”
1059	11:28	l3iz			λιμὸν μεγάλην μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι	1	“a great shortage of food would happen”
1060	11:28	pd2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	This was a generalization referring to the part of the world that they were interested in. Alternate translation: “all over the inhabited world” or “throughout the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1061	11:28	jmc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου	1	Luke’s audience would know that Claudius was the emperor of Rome at that time. Alternate translation: “when Claudius was the Roman emperor” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1062	11:29	lhp8				0	The words “They” and “they” refer to the believers in the church in Antioch (Acts 11:27).
1063	11:29	de92			δὲ	1	This word means marks an event that happened because of something else that happened first. In this case, they sent money because of Agabus’ prophesy or the famine.
1064	11:29	rk9z			καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις	1	The richer people sent more; the poorer people sent less.
1065	11:29	up7a			ἐν τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ ἀδελφοῖς	1	“the believers in Judea”
1066	11:30	l8i8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου	1	The hand is a synecdoche for the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1067	12:intro	f66j				0	Acts 12 General Notes Structure and formatting Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas was bringing Saul back from Tarsus and they were delivering money from Antioch Jerusalem (11:25-30). He killed many of the leaders of the church, and he put Peter in prison. After God helped Peter escape the prison, Herod killed the prison guards, and then God killed Herod. In the last verse of the chapter, Luke tells how Barnabas and Saul return to Antioch. Important figures of speech in this chapter Personification The “word of God” is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could grow and become many. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1068	12:1	u4w7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	This is background information about Herod’s killing James. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1069	12:1	ua9p				0	This begins the new persecution, first of James’ death and then of Peter’s imprisonment and then release.
1070	12:1	ti1y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	This begins a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1071	12:1	f2gr			κατ’ ἐκεῖνον & τὸν καιρὸν	1	This refers to the time of the famine.
1072	12:1	zy6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας & τινας	1	This means Herod had the believers arrested. See how you translated this in Acts 5:18. Alternate translation: “sent soldiers to arrest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1073	12:1	u1gv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	Only James and Peter are specified, which implies that these were leaders of the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1074	12:1	s7lc			κακῶσαί	1	“in order to cause the believers to suffer”
1075	12:2	aw4t			ἀνεῖλεν δὲ Ἰάκωβον, τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰωάννου, μαχαίρῃ	1	This tells the manner in which James was killed.
1076	12:2	r1zv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνεῖλεν & Ἰάκωβον	1	Possible meanings are (1) Herod himself killed James or (2) Herod ordered someone to kill James. Alternate translation: “Herod gave the order and they killed James” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1077	12:3	pms7				0	Here the word “he” refers to Herod (Acts 12:1).
1078	12:3	v4ag			ἰδὼν δὲ ὅτι ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	“When Herod realized that putting James to death pleased the Jewish leaders”
1079	12:3	wpm1			ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	“made the Jewish leaders happy”
1080	12:3	cu7s			ὅτι & ἐστιν	1	“Herod did this” or “This happened”
1081	12:3	ly66			ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων	1	This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. Alternate translation: “the festival when the Jewish people ate bread without yeast”
1082	12:4	pps1			τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν	1	“four groups of soldiers.” Each squad had four soldiers that guarded Peter, one group at a time. The groups divided the 24 hour day into four shifts. Each time two soldiers would have been at his side and the other two soldiers by the entrance.
1083	12:4	i23a			βουλόμενος & ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ	1	“Herod planned to judge Peter in the presence of the people” or “Herod planned to judge Peter before the Jewish people”
1084	12:5	v2yz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ	1	This implies that the soldiers continually guarded Peter in prison. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “So the soldiers guarded Peter in the prison” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1085	12:5	f8qc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσευχὴ & ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the group of believers in Jerusalem earnestly prayed to God for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1086	12:5	g189			ἐκτενῶς	1	continuously and with dedication
1087	12:6	km83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤμελλεν προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν ὁ Ἡρῴδης τῇ νυκτὶ ἐκείνῃ	1	That Herod planned to execute him can be clarified. Alternate translation: “The happened on the day before Herod was going to bring Peter out from prison to put him on trial and then to execute him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1088	12:6	g2bh			δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν	1	“tied with two chains” or “fastened with two chains.” Each chain would have been attached to one of the two guards who stayed beside Peter.
1089	12:6	aqv1			ἐτήρουν τὴν φυλακήν	1	“were guarding the prison doors”
1090	12:7	kk4i				0	The words “him” and “his” refer to Peter.
1091	12:7	i7g3			ἰδοὺ	1	This word alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows.
1092	12:7	lu25			ἐπέστη	1	“next to him” or “beside him”
1093	12:7	z2i1			ἐν τῷ οἰκήματι	1	“in the prison room”
1094	12:7	dc5b			πατάξας & τοῦ Πέτρου	1	“The angel tapped Peter” or “The angel poked Peter.” Peter was evidently sleeping deeply enough that this was required to wake him.
1095	12:7	dqn9			ἐξέπεσαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἁλύσεις ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν	1	The angel caused the chains to fall from Peter without touching them.
1096	12:8	hxt9			ἐποίησεν & οὕτως	1	“Peter did what the angel told him to do” or “Peter obeyed”
1097	12:8	abch			λέγει αὐτῷ	1	“The angel said to Peter”
1098	12:9	gx77				0	Here the word “He” refers to Peter. The words “they” and “They” refer to Peter and the angel.
1099	12:9	abci			ἠκολούθει	1	“Peter followed the angel”
1100	12:9	sh8k			οὐκ ᾔδει	1	“He did not understand”
1101	12:9	p9ty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου	1	This could be changed to active form. Alternate translation: “the actions of the angel were real” or “what the angel did truly happened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1102	12:10	r7gy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν	1	It is implied that the soldiers were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. Alternate translation: “The first and second guards did not see them as they passed by, and then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1103	12:10	c18q			διελθόντες	1	“had walked by”
1104	12:10	e36s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ δευτέραν	1	The word “guard” is understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1105	12:10	y86k			ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν	1	“Peter and the angel arrived at the iron gate”
1106	12:10	if3c			τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν	1	“that opened to the city” or “that went from the prison to the city”
1107	12:10	i3st		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς	1	Here “by itself” means neither Peter nor the angel opened it. Alternate translation: “the gate swung open for them” or “the gate opened itself for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1108	12:10	j268			προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν	1	“walked along a street”
1109	12:10	fl89			εὐθέως ἀπέστη & ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	“left Peter suddenly” or “suddenly disappeared”
1110	12:11	wlb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καὶ ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος	1	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “When Peter became fully awake and alert” or “When Peter became aware that what had happened was real” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1111	12:11	ue4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐξείλατό με ἐκ χειρὸς Ἡρῴδου	1	Here “the hand of Herod” refers to “Herod’s hold” or “Herod’s plans.” Alternate translation: “brought me from the harm Herod had planned for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1112	12:11	hw63			ἐξείλατό με	1	“rescued me”
1113	12:11	p739		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Here “the people of the Jews” probably referred mainly to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “all that the Jewish leaders thought would happen to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1114	12:12	tfh3			συνιδών	1	He became aware that God had rescued him.
1115	12:12	ux4v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Ἰωάννου, τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου	1	John was also called Mark. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “John, whom people also called Mark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1116	12:13	x5fg				0	Here the words “she” and “her” all refer to the servant girl Rhoda. Here the words they” and “They” refer to the people who were inside praying (Acts 12:12).
1117	12:13	pfn7			κρούσαντος & αὐτοῦ	1	“Peter knocked.” Tapping on the door was a normal Jewish custom to let others know you wish to visit them. You may need to change this to fit your culture.
1118	12:13	c634			τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος	1	“at the outer door” or “at the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard”
1119	12:13	khq1			προσῆλθε & ὑπακοῦσαι	1	“came to the gate to ask who was knocking”
1120	12:14	y2ff			ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς	1	“because she was so joyful” or “being overly excited”
1121	12:14	m3m7			οὐκ ἤνοιξεν τὸν πυλῶνα	1	“did not open the door” or “forgot to open the door”
1122	12:14	ky3p			εἰσδραμοῦσα	1	You may prefer to say “went running into the room in the house”
1123	12:14	yq3r			ἀπήγγειλεν	1	“she told them” or “she said”
1124	12:14	a19k			ἑστάναι & πρὸ τοῦ πυλῶνος	1	“standing outside the door.” Peter was still standing outside.
1125	12:15	ybz7			μαίνῃ	1	The people not only did not believe her, but rebuked her by saying she was crazy. Alternate translation: “You are crazy”
1126	12:15	xnm2			ἡ & διϊσχυρίζετο οὕτως ἔχειν	1	“she insisted that what she said was true”
1127	12:15	en8b			οἱ & ἔλεγον	1	“They answered”
1128	12:15	qa8m			ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ	1	“What you have seen is Peter’s angel.” Some Jews believed in guardian angels and may have thought that Peter’s angel had come to them.
1129	12:16	wwg1				0	Here the words “they” and “them” refer to the people in the house. The words “He” and “he” refer to Peter.
1130	12:16	bi6l			ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἐπέμενεν κρούων	1	The word “continued” means that Peter kept knocking the entire time those inside were talking.
1131	12:17	jx1a			ἀπαγγείλατε & ταῦτα	1	“Tell these things”
1132	12:17	jf16			τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	“the other believers”
1133	12:18	blx5				0	The word “him” here refers to Peter. The word “he” refers to Herod.
1134	12:18	ail9			δὲ	1	This word is used to mark a break in the story-line. Time has passed; it is now the next day.
1135	12:18	iqv4			γενομένης & ἡμέρας	1	“in the morning”
1136	12:18	zl7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο	1	This phrase is used to emphasize what really happened. This could be said in a positive way. Alternate translation: “there was a great disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1137	12:18	ilz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο	1	The abstract noun “disturbance” can be expressed with the words “disturbed” or “upset.” Alternate translation: “the soldiers were very disturbed about what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1138	12:19	twr1			Ἡρῴδης δὲ ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν καὶ μὴ εὑρὼν	1	“After Herod searched for Peter and could not find him”
1139	12:19	pz6v			Ἡρῴδης δὲ ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν	1	Possible meanings are that (1) “when Herod heard Peter was missing, he went himself to search the prison” or (2) “when Herod heard Peter was missing, he sent other soldiers to search the prison.”
1140	12:19	c69i			ἀνακρίνας τοὺς φύλακας, ἐκέλευσεν ἀπαχθῆναι	1	It was the normal punishment for the Roman government to kill the guards if their prisoner escaped.
1141	12:19	br16			καὶ κατελθὼν	1	The phrase “went down” is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Judea.
1142	12:20	n2lw				0	Luke continues with another event in Herod’s life.
1143	12:20	aip7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	This word is used here to mark the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1144	12:20	gxs4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	Here the word “They” is a generalization. It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon went to Herod. Alternate translation: “Men representing the people of Tyre and Sidon went together to talk with Herod” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1145	12:20	t6mi			πείσαντες Βλάστον	1	“These men persuaded Blastus”
1146	12:20	qsg4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βλάστον	1	Blastus was an assistant to or an officer of King Herod. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1147	12:20	l5r1			ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην	1	“these men requested peace”
1148	12:20	j253		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς	1	They probably purchased this food. Alternate translation: “the people of Tyre and Sidon bought all their food from the people that Herod ruled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1149	12:20	dy51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν	1	It is implied that Herod restricted this supply of food because he was angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1150	12:21	e3w9			τακτῇ & ἡμέρᾳ	1	This was probably the day on which Herod agreed to meet with the representatives. Alternate translation: “On the day when Herod agreed to meet them”
1151	12:21	kv7g			ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν	1	expensive clothing that would demonstrate he was the king
1152	12:21	g6ir			καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	This was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.
1153	12:22	ze1s				0	This is the end of the part of the story about Herod.
1154	12:23	b4bc			παραχρῆμα & ἄγγελος	1	“Right away an angel” or “While the people were praising Herod, an angel”
1155	12:23	b5s9			ἐπάταξεν αὐτὸν	1	“afflicted Herod” or “caused Herod to become very ill”
1156	12:23	iw57			οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Herod let those people worship him instead of telling them to worship God.
1157	12:23	d419		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν	1	Here “worms” refers to worms inside the body, probably intestinal worms. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “worms ate Herod’s insides and he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1158	12:24	j2un		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	Verse 24 continues the history from verse 23. Verse 25 continues the history from 11:30. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
1159	12:24	m1sw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο	1	The word of God is spoken of as if it was a living plant that was able to grow and reproduce. Alternate translation: “the message of God spread to more places and more people believed in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1160	12:24	wn8m			ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	“the message God sent about Jesus”
1161	12:25	pv6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν	1	This refers back to when they brought money from the believers at Antioch in Acts 11:29-30. Alternate translation: “delivered the money to the church leaders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1162	12:25	t7d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	They went back to Antioch from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul returned to Antioch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1163	13:intro	rlh6				0	Acts 13 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotes from Psalms in 13:33-35. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41. The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and it describes how it is the Gentiles and not the Jews to whom the believers tell the message about Jesus. Special concepts in this chapter A light for the Gentiles The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles as walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
1164	13:1	ce7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Verse 1 gives background information about the people in the church at Antioch. Here the first word “they” probably refers to these five leaders but may also include the other believers. The next words “they” and “their” probably refer to the other three leaders not including Barnabas and Saul but could include other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1165	13:1	qa2i				0	Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch send Barnabas and Saul.
1166	13:1	rej8			δὲ ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν	1	“At that time in the church at Antioch”
1167	13:1	srw6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συμεὼν & Νίγερ & Λούκιος & Μαναήν	1	These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1168	13:1	u48c			Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου σύντροφος	1	Manaen was probably Herod’s playmate or close friend growing up.
1169	13:2	ifb9			ἀφορίσατε & μο	1	“Appoint to serve me”
1170	13:2	j6ym			προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς	1	The verb here means that God chose them to do this work.
1171	13:3	ku45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς	1	“laid their hands on these men whom God had set apart for his service.” This act showed that the leaders agreed that the Holy Spirit had called Barnabas and Saul to do this work. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1172	13:3	p1us			ἀπέλυσαν	1	“sent those men off” or “sent those men off to do the work the Holy Spirit told them to do”
1173	13:4	br2m				0	Here the words “they,” “They,” and “their” refer to Barnabas and Silas.
1174	13:4	mt3h			οὖν	1	This word marks an event that happened because of a previous event. In this case, the previous event is Barnabas and Saul being set apart by the Holy Spirit.
1175	13:4	abcj			αὐτοὶ & ἐκπεμφθέντες	1	“Barnabas and Saul were sent out”
1176	13:4	iyh8			κατῆλθον	1	The phrase “went down” is used here because Seleucia is lower in elevation than Antioch.
1177	13:4	d1q5			Σελεύκιαν	1	a city by the sea
1178	13:5	at85			Σαλαμῖνι	1	The city of Salamis was on Cyprus Island.
1179	13:5	ct8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κατήγγελλον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	“Word of God” here is a synecdoche for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “proclaimed the message of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1180	13:5	p5t3			συναγωγαῖς τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Possible meanings are that (1) “there were multiple Jewish synagogues in the city of Salamis where Barnabas and Saul preached” or (2) “Barnabas and Saul started at the synagogue at Salamis and continued to preach in all the synagogues they found while they traveled around the Island of Cyprus.”
1181	13:5	sxw6			εἶχον δὲ καὶ Ἰωάννην, ὑπηρέτην	1	“John Mark went with them and was helping them”
1182	13:5	ukx2			ὑπηρέτην	1	“helper”
1183	13:6	h9he				0	Here the word “they” refers to Paul, Silas, and John Mark.The words “This man” refer to “Sergius Paulus.” The first word “he” refers to Sergius Paulus, the proconsul; the second word “he” refers to Elymas (also called Bar-Jesus), the magician.
1184	13:6	ja1i			ὅλην τὴν νῆσον	1	They crossed from one side of the island to the other and shared the gospel message in each town they passed through.
1185	13:6	cl2z			Πάφου	1	a major city on Cyprus island where the proconsul lived
1186	13:6	zf3b			εὗρον	1	Here “found” means they came upon him without looking for him. Alternate translation: “they met” or “they came upon”
1187	13:6	xe7h			ἄνδρα, τινὰ μάγον	1	“a particular person who practices witchcraft” or “a person who practices supernatural magic arts”
1188	13:6	ak38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ᾧ ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς	1	“Bar Jesus” means “Son of Jesus.” There is no relation between this man and Jesus Christ. Jesus was a common name at that time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1189	13:7	bee2			σὺν	1	“was often with” or “was often in the company of”
1190	13:7	s1su			ἀνθυπάτῳ	1	This was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor”
1191	13:7	h5xx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἀνδρὶ συνετῷ	1	This is background information about Sergius Paulus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1192	13:7	abck			προσκαλεσάμενος	1	“The proconsul summoned”
1193	13:8	lp2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἐλύμας ὁ μάγος	1	This was Bar-Jesus, who was also called “the magician.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1194	13:8	qw4j			οὕτως & μεθερμηνεύεται τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	“that was what he was called in Greek”
1195	13:8	n23s			ἀνθίστατο & αὐτοῖς & ζητῶν διαστρέψαι	1	“resisted them by trying to turn” or “attempted to stop them by trying to turn”
1196	13:8	w2xt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως	1	Here “to turn … away from” is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: “attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1197	13:9	gws2				0	The word “him” refers to the magician Elymas, who is also called Bar Jesus (Acts 13:6-8).
1198	13:9	nau1				0	While on the island of Paphos, Paul begins to talk to Elymas.
1199	13:9	ey6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Σαῦλος & ὁ καὶ Παῦλος	1	“Saul” as his Jewish name, and “Paul” was his Roman name. Since he was speaking to a Roman official, he used his Roman name. Alternate translation: “Saul, who now called himself Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1200	13:9	xjy9			ἀτενίσας εἰς αὐτὸν	1	“looked at him intensely”
1201	13:10	d2pk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	υἱὲ διαβόλου	1	Paul is saying the man is acting like the devil. Alternate translation: “You are like the devil” or “You act like the devil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1202	13:10	r8x2			ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	“you are always intent in causing others to believe what is not true using falsehood and always doing what is wrong”
1203	13:10	pyu7			ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	In this context it means to be lazy and not diligent in following God’s law.
1204	13:10	hlq9			ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is grouping Elymas with the devil. Just as the devil is an enemy of God and is against righteousness, so also was Elymas.
1205	13:10	bc9p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας	1	Paul uses this question to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. Alternate translation: “You are always saying that the truth about the Lord God is false!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1206	13:10	p8sa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας	1	Here “straight paths” refer to the ways that are true. Alternate translation: “the true ways of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1207	13:11	k51g				0	The words “you” and “him” refer to Elymas the magician. The word “he” refers to the Sergius Paulus, proconsul (governor of Paphos).
1208	13:11	pey7				0	Paul finishes speaking to Elymas.
1209	13:11	xul9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ	1	Here “hand’ represents the power of God and “upon you” implies punishment. Alternate translation: “The Lord will punish you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1210	13:11	rse8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔσῃ τυφλὸς	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will make you blind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1211	13:11	w3gh			μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον	1	Elymas will be so completely blind that he not even be able to see the sun. Alternate translation: “You will not even see the sun”
1212	13:11	b5b8			ἄχρι καιροῦ	1	“for a period of time” or “until the time appointed by God”
1213	13:11	t7j1			ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος	1	“the eyes of Elymas became blurry and then dark” or “Elymas started seeing unclearly and then he could not see anything”
1214	13:11	a7es			περιάγων	1	“Elymas wandered around” or “Elymas started feeling around and”
1215	13:12	x9fl			ἀνθύπατος	1	This was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor”
1216	13:12	pyh7			ἐπίστευσεν	1	“he believed in Jesus”
1217	13:12	twa8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the teaching about the Lord amazed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1218	13:13	i65t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Verses 13 and 14 give background information about this part of the story. “Paul and his friends” were Barnabas and John Mark (also called John). From this point on, Saul is called Paul in Acts. Paul’s name is listed first which indicates that he had become the leader of the group. It is important to keep this order in the translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1219	13:13	rk3k				0	This is a new part of the story about Paul in Antioch in Pisidia.
1220	13:13	r9hi			δὲ	1	This marks the beginning of a new part of the story.
1221	13:13	abcl			οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον	1	This refers to Paul and his companions.
1222	13:13	k4s9			ἀναχθέντες & ἀπὸ τῆς Πάφου	1	“traveled by sailboat from Paphos”
1223	13:13	h1cb			ἦλθον εἰς Πέργην τῆς Παμφυλίας	1	“arrived in Perga which is in Pamphylia”
1224	13:13	g6l5			Ἰωάννης δὲ ἀποχωρήσας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	“But John Mark left Paul and Barnabas”
1225	13:14	vrp1			Ἀντιόχειαν τὴν Πισιδίαν	1	“the city of Antioch in the district of Pisidia”
1226	13:15	dnb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	The “law and the prophets” refer to parts of the Jewish scriptures which were read. Alternate translation: “After someone read from the books of the law and the writings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1227	13:15	z7bh			ἀπέστειλαν & πρὸς αὐτοὺς λέγοντες	1	“told someone to say” or “asked someone to say”
1228	13:15	td4h			ἀδελφοί	1	The term “brothers” is here used by the people in the synagogue to refer to Paul and Barnabas as fellow Jews.
1229	13:15	jru8			εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως	1	“if you want to say anything to encourage us”
1230	13:15	kj1h			λέγετε	1	“please speak it” or “please tell it to us”
1231	13:16	tbc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The first word “he” refers to Paul. The second word “he” refers to God. Here the word “our” refers to Paul and his fellow Jews. The words “they” and “them” refer to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1232	13:16	p93q				0	Paul begins his speech to those in the synagogue in Pisidian Antioch. He begins by talking about things that happened in Israel’s history.
1233	13:16	i8pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ	1	This could refer to moving his hands as a signal that he was ready to speak. Alternate translation: “moved his hands to show that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1234	13:16	rh93			οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	This refers to Gentiles who had converted to Judaism. “you who are not Israelites but who worship God”
1235	13:16	ah55			τὸν Θεόν, ἀκούσατε	1	“God, listen to me” or “God, listen to what I am about to say”
1236	13:17	se2b			ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου Ἰσραὴλ	1	“The God the people of Israel worship”
1237	13:17	l9cn			τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν	1	“our ancestors”
1238	13:17	aaj5			τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν	1	“caused them to become very numerous”
1239	13:17	vw4z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ	1	This refers to God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “with great power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1240	13:17	b74t			ἐξ αὐτῆς	1	“out from the land of Egypt”
1241	13:18	zv9e			ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς	1	This means “he tolerated them.” Some versions have a different word that means “he took care of them.” Alternate translation: “God endured their disobedience” or “God took care of them”
1242	13:19	nvp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “he” refers to God. The words “their land” refer to the land the seven nations had previously occupied. The word “them” refers to the people of Israel. The word “our” refers to Paul and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1243	13:19	h5qg			ἔθνη	1	Here the word “nations” refers to different people groups and not to geographical boundaries.
1244	13:20	m4jd			ὡς ἔτεσι τετρακοσίοις καὶ πεντήκοντα	1	“took more than 450 years to accomplish”
1245	13:20	abcm			ἔδωκεν	1	“God gave them”
1246	13:20	qmc8			ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου	1	“until the time of the prophet Samuel”
1247	13:21	akg6				0	The quotation here is from the history of Samuel and from a Psalm of Ethan in the Old Testament.
1248	13:21	yxi8			ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα	1	“to be their king for forty years”
1249	13:22	z4x3			μεταστήσας αὐτὸν	1	This expression means God caused Saul to stop being king. Alternate translation: “rejected Saul from being king”
1250	13:22	bsp6			ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς εἰς βασιλέα	1	“God chose David to be their king”
1251	13:22	iyd6			βασιλέα	1	“the king of Israel” or “the king over the Israelites”
1252	13:22	sw2r			ᾧ & εἶπεν	1	“God said this about David”
1253	13:22	dbu5			εὗρον	1	“I have observed that”
1254	13:22	mp53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου	1	This expression means he “is a man who wants what I want.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1255	13:23	lby6				0	The quotation here is from the Gospels.
1256	13:23	xj5a			τούτου & ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος	1	“From David’s descendants.” This is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the savior had to be one of David’s descendants (Acts 13:22).
1257	13:23	kc76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἤγαγεν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	This refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “gave to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1258	13:23	mk5g			κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν	1	“just as God promised he would do”
1259	13:24	abcn			πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ	1	“before the coming of Jesus”
1260	13:24	x892		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	βάπτισμα μετανοίας	1	You can translate the word “repentance” as the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism to repent” or “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent for their sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1261	13:25	vww3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι?	1	John asked this question to compel the people to think about who he was. Alternate translation: “Think about who I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1262	13:25	rp32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ	1	John was referring to the Messiah, whom they were expecting to come. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1263	13:25	nnl5			ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ	1	This emphasizes the importance of what he will say next.
1264	13:25	r1pl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ	1	This also refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “The Messiah will soon come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1265	13:25	gys2			οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι	1	“I am not worthy even to untie his shoes.” The Messiah is so much greater than John that he did not even feel worthy do the lowest job for him.
1266	13:26	jdp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “they” and “their” refers to the Jews who lived in Jerusalem. Here the word “us” includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1267	13:26	kci9			ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	Paul addresses his audience of Jews and Gentile converts to Judaism to remind them of their special status as worshiping the true God.
1268	13:26	u6zn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sent the message about this salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1269	13:26	v6r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης	1	The word “salvation” can be translated with the verb “save.” Alternate translation: “that God will save people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1270	13:27	psk5			τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες	1	“did not realize that this man Jesus was the one whom God had sent to save them”
1271	13:27	ri1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν	1	Here the word “sayings” represents the message of the prophets. Alternate translation: “the writings of the prophets” or “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1272	13:27	m4tz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “which someone reads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1273	13:27	rle6			τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν & ἐπλήρωσαν	1	“they actually did just what the prophets said they would do in the books of the prophets”
1274	13:28	v3hw				0	Here the word “they” refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem. The word him” here refers to Jesus.
1275	13:28	y9j6			μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου εὑρόντες	1	“they did not find any reason why anyone should kill Jesus”
1276	13:28	d4xm			ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον	1	The word “asked” here is a strong word meaning to demand, beg or plead for.
1277	13:29	sq1j			ὡς δὲ ἐτέλεσαν πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα	1	“When thy did to Jesus all the things that the prophets said would happen to him”
1278	13:29	m5f1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθελόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου	1	It may be helpful to explicitly say Jesus died before this happened. Alternate translation: “they killed Jesus and then took him down from the cross after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1279	13:29	vwt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου	1	“from the cross.” This was another way people at that time referred to the cross. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1280	13:30	h5jw			ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν	1	“But” indicates a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did.
1281	13:30	mqx8			ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	“raised him from among those who were dead.” To be with “the dead” means that Jesus was dead.
1282	13:30	zsx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν	1	Here, to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1283	13:30	d14p			ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To raise someone from among them speaks of making that person alive again.
1284	13:31	ig7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The disciples who traveled with Jesus from Galilee to Jerusalem saw him for many days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1285	13:31	g4vl			ἡμέρας πλείους	1	We know from other writings that this period was 40 days. Translate “many days” with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time.
1286	13:31	vqj4			νῦν εἰσιν μάρτυρες αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸν λαόν	1	“are now testifying to the people about Jesus” or “are now telling the people about Jesus”
1287	13:32	ipb9				0	The second quotation here is from the prophet Isaiah.
1288	13:32	y273			καὶ	1	This word marks an event that happened because of previous event. In this case, the previous event is God’s raising Jesus from the dead.
1289	13:32	hr2g			τοὺς πατέρας	1	“our ancestors.” Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These were the physical ancestors of the Jews, and the spiritual ancestors of the converts.
1290	13:33	b1uh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν, ἀναστήσας	1	You may need to rearrange the parts of this sentence, which begins in verse 32. “God has fulfilled for us, their children, these promises that he made to our ancestors, by” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1291	13:33	dy6w			τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	“for us, who are the children of our ancestors.” Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These were the physical ancestors of the Jews, and the spiritual ancestors of the converts.
1292	13:33	d95n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν	1	Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “by making Jesus alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1293	13:33	y3tz			ὡς & ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	“This is what was written in the second Psalm”
1294	13:33	h9ir			τῷ ψαλμῷ & τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	“Psalm 2”
1295	13:33	tla1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱός & γεγέννηκά σε	1	These are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1296	13:34	iy5q			ὅτι δὲ ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν, μηκέτι μέλλοντα ὑποστρέφειν εἰς διαφθοράν, οὕτως εἴρηκεν	1	“God spoke these words about his making Jesus alive again so that he would never die again”
1297	13:34	h3nj			ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
1298	13:34	q3kq			τὰ ὅσια & τὰ πιστά	1	“certain blessings”
1299	13:35	r1ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διότι καὶ ἐν ἑτέρῳ λέγει	1	Paul’s audience would have understood that this Psalm refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “In another Psalm of David, he also says about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1300	13:35	gl8s			καὶ & λέγει	1	“David also says.” David is the author of Psalm 16 from which this quotation is taken.
1301	13:35	hvt8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	The phrase “see decay” is a metonym for “decay.” Alternate translation: “You will not allow the body of your Holy One to rot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1302	13:35	ry97			οὐ δώσεις	1	David is speaking to God here.
1303	13:36	u8vh			ἰδίᾳ γενεᾷ	1	“during his lifetime”
1304	13:36	m5wx			ὑπηρετήσας τῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ βουλῇ	1	“did what God wanted him to do” or “did what pleased God”
1305	13:36	rpb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐκοιμήθη	1	This was a polite way to refer to death. Alternate translation: “he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1306	13:36	nwy9			προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ	1	“was buried with his ancestors who had died”
1307	13:36	la5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	The phrase “experienced decay” is a metonym for “his body decayed.” Alternate translation: “his body rotted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1308	13:37	bmw3			ὃν δὲ	1	“but Jesus whom”
1309	13:37	n9pl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1310	13:37	j52x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	The phrase “experienced no decay” is a way to say “his body did not decay.” Alternate translation: “did not rot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1311	13:38	ki8q				0	Here the word “him” refers to Jesus.
1312	13:38	yg35			γνωστὸν & ἔστω ὑμῖν	1	“know this” or “this is important for you to know”
1313	13:38	qy18			ἀδελφοί	1	Paul uses this term because they are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. Alternate translation: “my fellow Israelites and other friends”
1314	13:38	t3i5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅτι διὰ τούτου, ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that we proclaim to you that your sins can be forgiven through Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1315	13:38	w7y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν	1	The abstract noun “forgiveness” can be translated with the verb “to forgive.” Alternate translation: “that God can forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1316	13:39	j6rr			ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων	1	“By him every person who believes” or “Every one who believes in him”
1317	13:39	g5h9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus justifies everyone who believes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1318	13:40	kk1j				0	In his message to the people in the synagogue, Paul quotes the prophet Habakkuk. Here the word “I” refers to God.
1319	13:40	zx6p				0	Paul finishes his speech in the synagogue in Pisidian Antioch, which he began in Acts 13:16.
1320	13:40	y2kg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βλέπετε	1	It is implied that the thing they should be careful about is Paul’s message. Alternate translation: “give close attention to the things I have said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1321	13:40	tt1x			τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις	1	“so that what the prophets spoke about”
1322	13:41	tqk5			ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί	1	“you who feel contempt” or “you who ridicule”
1323	13:41	ky3s			θαυμάσατε	1	“be amazed” or “be shocked”
1324	13:41	ilh2			καὶ ἀφανίσθητε	1	“then die”
1325	13:41	dvn1			ἔργον ἐργάζομαι	1	“am doing something” or “am doing a deed”
1326	13:41	nm2q			ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν	1	“during your lifetime”
1327	13:41	w6tq			ἔργον ὃ	1	“I am doing something which”
1328	13:41	p4c2			ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν	1	“even if someone tells you about it”
1329	13:42	ax8v			ἐξιόντων δὲ	1	“When Paul and Barnabas were leaving”
1330	13:42	f3sw			ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν παρεκάλουν	1	“As Paul and Barnabas left, the people begged them”
1331	13:42	y4p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα	1	Here “words” refers to the message that Paul had spoken. Alternate translation: “this same message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1332	13:43	a58z			λυθείσης δὲ τῆς συναγωγῆς	1	Possible meanings are (1) this restates “As Paul and Barnabas left” in verse 42 or (2) Paul and Barnabas left the meeting before it ended and this occurs later.
1333	13:43	sws7			προσηλύτων	1	These were non-Jewish people who converted to Judaism.
1334	13:43	q2aj			οἵτινες προσλαλοῦντες αὐτοῖς, ἔπειθον αὐτοὺς	1	“and Paul and Barnabas spoke to those people and urged them”
1335	13:43	fv15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	It is implied that they believed Paul’s message that Jesus was the Messiah. Alternate translation: “to continue to trust that God kindly forgives people’s sins because of what Jesus did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1336	13:44	m129				0	Here the word “him” refers to Paul.
1337	13:44	vq3y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις	1	The “city” represents the people in the city. This phrase is used to show the great response to the Lord’s word. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1338	13:44	yga7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	It is implied that Paul and Barnabas were the ones who spoke the word of the Lord. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1339	13:45	j4zq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Here “Jews” represents Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1340	13:45	qrh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	Here jealousy is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1341	13:45	nc5l			ἀντέλεγον	1	“contradicted” or “opposed”
1342	13:45	m1an		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1343	13:46	zvt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The first two instances of the word “you” are plural and refer to the Jews to whom Paul is speaking. Here the words “we” and “us” refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present. Paul’s quotation is from the prophet Isaiah in the Old Testament. In the original passage, the word “I” refers to God and the word “you” is singular and refers to the Messiah. Here, Paul and Barnabas seem to be saying that the quotation also refers to their ministry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1344	13:46	as6q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦν ἀναγκαῖον	1	This implies that God had commanded this be done. Alternate translation: “God commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1345	13:46	jn55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμῖν & ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This can be stated in active form. “Word of God” here is a synecdoche for “message from God.” Alternate translation: “that we speak the message from God to you first” or “that we speak the word of God to you first” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1346	13:46	lly5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν	1	Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1347	13:46	ms36			οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς	1	“have shown that you are not worthy of eternal life” or “act as though you are not worthy of eternal life”
1348	13:46	rf9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη	1	“we will go to the Gentiles.” Paul and Barnadas were implying that they would preach to the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1349	13:47	v8au		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς φῶς	1	Here the truth about Jesus that Paul was preaching is spoken of as if it were a light that allowed people to see. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1350	13:47	t5sp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	The abstract word “salvation” can be translated with the verb “to save.” The phrase “uttermost parts” refers to everywhere. Alternate translation: “tell people everywhere in the world that I want to save them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1351	13:48	e9ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐδόξαζον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here “word” refers to the message about Jesus that they had believed. Alternate translation: “praised God for the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1352	13:48	jct2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἦσαν τεταγμένοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “As many as God appointed to eternal life believed” or “All the people whom God had chosen to receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1353	13:49	qh9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διεφέρετο & ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας	1	Here “word” refers to the message about Jesus. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Those who believed spread the word of the Lord through the whole region” or “Those who believed went everywhere in the region and told others about the message of Jesus” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1354	13:50	eqi5				0	Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas.
1355	13:50	t4bv				0	This ends Paul and Barnabas’ time in Antioch of Pisidia and they go to Iconium.
1356	13:50	u8rm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ & Ἰουδαῖοι	1	This probably refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1357	13:50	cf21			παρώτρυναν	1	“convinced” or “stirred up”
1358	13:50	wmm5			τοὺς πρώτους	1	“the most important men”
1359	13:50	n7qe			ἐπήγειραν διωγμὸν ἐπὶ τὸν Παῦλον καὶ Βαρναβᾶν	1	“They convinced the important men and women to persecute Paul and Barnabas”
1360	13:50	cq9h			ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν	1	“removed Paul and Barnabas from their city”
1361	13:51	abco			οἱ δὲ, ἐκτιναξάμενοι	1	“But Paul and Silas shook off”
1362	13:51	xi1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage	ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς	1	This was a symbolic act to indicate to the unbelieving people that God had rejected them and would punish them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
1363	13:52	dp5k			οἵ & μαθηταὶ	1	This probably refers to the new believers in the Antioch of Pisidia that Paul and Silas just left.
1364	14:intro	rsg2				0	Acts 14 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter “The message of his grace” The message of Jesus is the message that God will show grace to those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) Zeus and Hermes The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods who do not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.” Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul is saying the same thing using different words.
1365	14:1	vh8u				0	The story of Paul and Barnabas in Iconium continues.
1366	14:1	abcp			εἰσελθεῖν αὐτοὺς	1	'
1367	14:1	hk1z			ἐγένετο δὲ, ἐν Ἰκονίῳ	1	“Paul and Barnabas entered”
1368	14:1	f4sq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λαλῆσαι οὕτως	1	“spoke so powerfully.” It may be helpful to state that they spoke the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke the message about Jesus so powerfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1369	14:2	wc4x			οἱ & ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι	1	This refers to a portion of the Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus.
1370	14:2	n2pp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπήγειραν & τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	Causing the Gentiles to become angry is spoken of as if calm waters were disturbed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1371	14:2	k8mv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὰς ψυχὰς	1	Here the word “minds” refers to the people. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1372	14:2	fu13			τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Here “brothers” refers to Paul and Barnabas and the new believers.
1373	14:3	lp4v				0	Here the word “He” refers to the Lord.
1374	14:3	a3gp			μὲν οὖν & διέτριψαν	1	“Nevertheless they stayed there.” Paul and Barnabas stayed in Iconium to help the many people who had believed in Acts 14:1. “So” could be omitted if it adds confusion to the text.
1375	14:3	f2xh			τῷ μαρτυροῦντι τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	“demonstrated that the message about his grace was true”
1376	14:3	wcn5			τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	“about the message of the Lord’s grace”
1377	14:3	c2cv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διδόντι σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα γίνεσθαι διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “by enabling Paul and Barnabas to perform signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1378	14:3	p9iq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	Here “hands” refers to the will and effort of these two men as guided by the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by the ministry of Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1379	14:4	btu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐσχίσθη & τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως	1	Here “city”refers to the people in the city. Alternate translation: “most of the people of the city were divided” or “most of the people of the city did not agree with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1380	14:4	smz5			ἦσαν σὺν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	“supported the Jews” or “agreed with the Jews.” The first group mentioned did not agree with the message about grace.
1381	14:4	q1xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις	1	The second group mentioned agreed with the message about grace. It may be helpful to restate the verb. Alternate translation: “sided with the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1382	14:4	mw9h			τοῖς ἀποστόλοις	1	Luke refers to Paul and Barnabas. Here “apostle” might be used in the general sense of “ones sent out.”
1383	14:5	s5h7				0	Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas.
1384	14:5	q6g2			ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς	1	“to beat Paul and Barnabas and to kill them by throwing stones at them”
1385	14:6	tpl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Λυκαονίας	1	A district in Asia Minor (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1386	14:6	m5gv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λύστραν	1	A city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and north of Derbe (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1387	14:6	tl4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δέρβην	1	A city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and Lystra (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1388	14:7	z5nd			κἀκεῖ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι ἦσαν	1	“where Paul and Barnabas continued to proclaim the good news”
1389	14:8	ep46				0	The first word “he” refers to the crippled man; the second word “he” refers to Paul. The word “him” refers to the crippled man.
1390	14:8	l5pu				0	Paul and Barnabas are now in Lystra.
1391	14:8	wb5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τις ἀνὴρ & ἐκάθητο	1	This introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1392	14:8	kz7d			ἀδύνατος & τοῖς ποσὶν	1	“unable to move his legs” or “unable to walk on his feet”
1393	14:8	tca1			χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	“having been born as a cripple”
1394	14:8	hw4l			χωλὸς	1	person who cannot walk
1395	14:9	di49			ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ	1	“Paul looked straight at the man”
1396	14:9	xak4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι	1	The abstract noun “faith” can be translated with the verb “believe.” Alternate translation: “believed that Jesus could heal him” or “believed that Jesus could make him well” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1397	14:10	v1kz			ἥλατο	1	“leaped in the air.” This implies that his legs were completely healed.
1398	14:11	axe6			ὃ ἐποίησεν Παῦλος	1	This refers to Paul’s healing the crippled man.
1399	14:11	lvs9			ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν	1	To raise the voice is to speak loudly. Alternate translation: “they spoke loudly” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
1400	14:11	d1gz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ θεοὶ & κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς	1	A large number of people believed Paul and Barnabas were their pagan gods who had come down from heaven. Alternate translation: “The gods have come down from heaven to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1401	14:11	x3bi			Λυκαονιστὶ	1	“in their own Lycaonian language.” The people of Lystra spoke Lycaonian and also Greek.
1402	14:11	rm85			ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις	1	These people believed that the gods needed to change their appearance in order to look like men.
1403	14:12	t7uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δία	1	Zeus was the king over all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1404	14:12	hh25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἑρμῆν	1	Hermes was the pagan god who brought messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1405	14:13	iz6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅ τε ἱερεὺς τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως & ἐνέγκας	1	It may be helpful to include additional information about the priest. Alternate translation: “There was a temple just outside the city where the people worshiped Zeus. When the priest who served in the temple heard what Paul and Barnabas had done, he brought” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1406	14:13	v2a9			ταύρους καὶ στέμματα	1	The oxen were to be sacrificed. The wreaths were either to crown Paul and Barnabas, or put on the oxen for sacrifice.
1407	14:13	iha1			ἐπὶ τοὺς πυλῶνας	1	The gates of the cities were often used as a meeting place for the people of the city.
1408	14:13	ud37			ἤθελεν θύειν	1	“wanted to offer sacrifice to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes”
1409	14:14	kt1f			οἱ ἀπόστολοι Βαρναβᾶς καὶ Παῦλος	1	Luke is here probably using “apostle” in the general sense of “one sent out.”
1410	14:14	kx43			διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν	1	This was a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them.
1411	14:15	w4fd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε	1	Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. Alternate translation: “Men, you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1412	14:15	f8vc			ταῦτα ποιεῖτε	1	“worshiping us”
1413	14:15	u9pq			καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι	1	By this statement, Barnabas and Paul are saying that they are not gods. Alternate translation: “We are just human beings like you. We are not gods!”
1414	14:15	n9e4			ὁμοιοπαθεῖς & ὑμῖν	1	“like you in every way”
1415	14:15	n98g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα	1	Here “turn from … to” is a metaphor meaning to stop doing one thing and start doing something else. Alternate translation: “stop worshiping these false gods that cannot help you, and instead begin to worship the living God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1416	14:15	qr5b			Θεὸν ζῶντα	1	“a God who truly exists” or “a God who lives”
1417	14:16	s2rn			ἐν ταῖς παρῳχημέναις γενεαῖς	1	“In previous times” or “Until now”
1418	14:16	vpt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν	1	Walking in a way, or walking on a path, is a metaphor for living one’s life. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do whatever they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1419	14:17	fw2s				0	Paul and Barnabas continue speaking to the crowd outside the city of Lystra (Acts 14:8).
1420	14:17	kig8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν	1	This could also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “God has certainly left a witness” or “God has indeed testified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1421	14:17	s3qn			ἀγαθουργῶν	1	“as shown by the fact that”
1422	14:17	ps9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐμπιπλῶν τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν	1	Here “you hearts” refers to the people. Alternate translation: “giving you enough to eat and things about which to be happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1423	14:18	ut73			μόλις κατέπαυσαν τοὺς ὄχλους τοῦ μὴ θύειν αὐτοῖς	1	Paul and Barnabas stopped the multitude from sacrificing to them, but it was difficult to do so.
1424	14:18	la43			μόλις κατέπαυσαν	1	“had difficulty preventing”
1425	14:19	bz7k				0	Here the words “he” and “him” refer to Paul.
1426	14:19	wmc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους	1	It my be helpful to explicitly state what they persuaded the crowd to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the people not to believe Paul and Barnabas, and to turn against them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1427	14:19	xbv3			τοὺς ὄχλους	1	This may not be the same group as the “multitude” in the previous verse. Some time had passed, and this might be a different group that gathered together.
1428	14:19	t8mg			νομίζοντες αὐτὸν τεθνηκέναι	1	“because they thought that he was already dead”
1429	14:20	pan3			τῶν μαθητῶν	1	These were new believers in the city of Lystra.
1430	14:20	aqx3			εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν	1	“Paul re-entered Lystra with the believers”
1431	14:20	e2y9			ἐξῆλθεν σὺν τῷ Βαρναβᾷ εἰς Δέρβην	1	“Paul and Barnabas went to the city of Derbe”
1432	14:21	wv7e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the words “they” and “They” refer to Paul. Here the word “We” includes Paul, Barnabas, and the believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1433	14:21	ykt4			τὴν πόλιν ἐκείνην	1	“Derbe” (Acts 14:20)
1434	14:22	ek9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν	1	Here “souls” refers to the disciples. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus” or “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1435	14:22	zkd2			παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει	1	“encouraging the believers to keep trusting in Jesus”
1436	14:22	d9ic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Some version translate this as an indirect quote, “saying that we must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.” The word “we” here includes Luke and the readers. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1437	14:22	wu1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν	1	Paul includes his hearers, so the word “we” is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1438	14:23	pk5l				0	Except for the third use of the word “they” which refers to the people that Paul and Barnabas had led to the Lord, all the words “they” here refer to Paul and Barnabas.
1439	14:23	mqp9			χειροτονήσαντες δὲ αὐτοῖς κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν πρεσβυτέρους	1	“When Paul and Barnabas had appointed leaders in each new group of believers”
1440	14:23	nd87			παρέθεντο αὐτοὺς	1	Possible meanings are (1) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the elders they had appointed” or (2) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the leaders and other believers”
1441	14:23	ls62			εἰς ὃν πεπιστεύκεισαν	1	Who “they” refers to depends on your choice for the meaning of “them” in the previous note (either elders or leaders and other believers).
1442	14:25	t513		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καὶ λαλήσαντες ἐν Πέργῃ τὸν λόγον	1	“Word” here is a metonym for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1443	14:25	h8sh			κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν	1	The phrase “went down” is used here because Attalia is lower in elevation than Perga.
1444	14:26	f2cg			ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This can be stated in the active form. Alternate translation: “where believers and leaders in Antioch had committed Paul and Barnabas to the grace of God” or “where the people of Antioch prayed that God would care for and protect Paul and Barnabas”
1445	14:27	vcd3				0	Here the words “they,” “them,” and “They” refer to Paul and Barnabas. The word “he” refers to God.
1446	14:27	i9dv			συναγαγόντες τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1	“called the local believers to meet together”
1447	14:27	b4id		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως	1	God’s enabling the Gentiles to believe is spoken of as if he had opened a door that had prevented them from entering into faith. Alternate translation: “God had made it possible for the Gentiles to believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1448	14:28	abcq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον	1	This phrase is a litotes. The words not and a little together mean ‘a lot.’ Alternate translation: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1449	15:intro	h917				0	Acts 15 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16-17. The meeting that Luke describes in this chapter is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.” This was a time when many church leaders got together to decide if believers needed to obey the whole law of Moses. Special concepts in this chapter Brothers In this chapter Luke begins to use the word “brothers” to refer to fellow Christians instead of fellow Jews. Obeying the law of Moses Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised and that this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not want the Gentiles to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. “Abstain from things sacrificed to idols, blood, things strangled, and from sexual immorality” It is possible that the church leaders decided on these laws so that Jews and Gentiles could not only live together but eat the same foods together.
1450	15:1	qck6				0	Paul and Barnabas are still in Antioch when there is a dispute about the Gentiles and circumcision.
1451	15:1	su66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τινες	1	“Some men.” You can make explicit that these men were Jews who believed in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1452	15:1	p3k9			κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	The phrase “came down” is used here because Judea is higher in elevation than Antioch.
1453	15:1	zi1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Here “brothers” stands for believers in Christ. It is implied that they were in Antioch. Alternate translation: “taught the believers at Antioch” or “were teaching the believers at Antioch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1454	15:1	pm8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε τῷ ἔθει τῷ Μωϋσέως, οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you according to the custom of Moses, God cannot save you” or “God will not save you from your sins unless you receive circumcision according to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1455	15:2	abcr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης	1	This phrase is a litotes. The words not and a little together mean ‘a lot.’ Alternate translation: “a sharp dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1456	15:2	f9nd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	γενομένης & στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης	1	The abstract nouns “dispute” and “debate” can be stated as verbs and where the men came from can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “strongly confronted and debated” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1457	15:2	ek6a			ἀναβαίνειν & εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem.
1458	15:2	z983			τοῦ ζητήματος τούτου	1	“this issue”
1459	15:3	h2mw				0	Here the words “They,” “they,” and “them” refer to Paul, Barnabas, and certain others (Acts 15:2).
1460	15:3	av5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ μὲν οὖν προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Therefore the community of believers sent them from Antioch to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1461	15:3	aia5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	Here “church” stands for the people that were a part of the church. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1462	15:3	i5kd			διήρχοντο τήν τε Φοινίκην καὶ Σαμάρειαν, ἐκδιηγούμενοι	1	The words “passed through” and “announced” indicate they spent some time in different places sharing in detail what God was doing.
1463	15:3	rk37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	The abstract noun “conversion” means the Gentiles were rejecting their false gods and believing in God. Alternate translation: “announced to the community of believers in those places that Gentiles were believing in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1464	15:3	nje7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	Their message causing the brothers to be joyful is spoken of as if “joy” were an object that they brought to the brothers. Alternate translation: “What they said caused their fellow believers to rejoice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1465	15:3	bbd4			τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	Here “brothers” refers to fellow believers.
1466	15:4	ej1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles, the elders, and the rest of the community of believers welcomed them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1467	15:4	a2x1			μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	“through them”
1468	15:5	efe5				0	Here the word “them” refers to non-Jewish believers who were not circumcised and did not keep the Old Testament laws of God.
1469	15:5	f2b5				0	Paul and Barnabas are now in Jerusalem to meet with the apostles and elders there.
1470	15:5	k6k7			δέ τινες	1	Here Luke contrasts those who believe that salvation is only in Jesus to others who believe salvation is by Jesus yet also believe that circumcision is required for salvation.
1471	15:5	b9nt			τηρεῖν τὸν νόμον Μωϋσέως	1	“to obey the law of Moses”
1472	15:6	ugu6			ἰδεῖν περὶ τοῦ λόγου τούτου	1	The church leaders decided to discuss whether or not Gentiles needed to be circumcised and obey the law of Moses in order for God to save them from their sins.
1473	15:7	wct8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	The first word “them” refers to apostles and elders (Acts 15:6) and the other words “them” and “their” refer to the believing Gentiles. Here the word “you” is plural and refers to the apostles and elders present. The word “he” refers to God. Here “us” is plural and refers to Peter, the apostles and elders, and all Jewish believers in general. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1474	15:7	hxu9				0	Peter begins to speak to the apostles and elders who met to discuss whether Gentiles had to receive circumcision and keep the law (Acts 15:5-6).
1475	15:7	a6q9			ἀδελφοί	1	Peter is addressing all of the believers who were present.
1476	15:7	s3wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου	1	Here “mouth” refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “from me” or “by me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1477	15:7	yer1			ἀκοῦσαι τὰ ἔθνη	1	“the Gentiles would hear”
1478	15:7	b5s8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	Here “word” stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1479	15:8	m1xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ καρδιογνώστης	1	Here “heart” refers to the “minds” or “inner beings.” Alternate translation: “who knows the people’s minds” or “who knows what people think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1480	15:8	p6d2			ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς	1	“witnesses to the Gentiles”
1481	15:8	i1gc			δοὺς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	“causing the Holy Spirit to come upon them”
1482	15:8	abcs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν	1	Here Luke expects his readers to understand the words ‘he gave’ that he leaves out. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1483	15:9	zs2g			οὐδὲν διέκρινεν	1	God did not treat Jewish believers different from Gentile believers.
1484	15:9	ase1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	God’s forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins is spoken as though he literally cleaned their hearts. Here “heart” stands for the person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “forgiving their sins because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1485	15:10	ha45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Peter includes his audience by his use of “our” and “we.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1486	15:10	wjq7				0	Peter finishes speaking to the apostles and elders.
1487	15:10	rfr4			νῦν	1	This does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
1488	15:10	zaz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι	1	Peter uses a question with a word picture to tell the Jewish believers they should not require the non-Jewish believers to perform circumcision to be saved. Alternate translation: “Do not test God by putting a burden on the non-Jewish believers which we Jews were not able to bear!” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1489	15:10	bfd5			οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	This refers to their Jewish ancestors.
1490	15:11	q28c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀλλὰ διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “But we believe the Lord Jesus shall save us by his grace, just as he saved the non-Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1491	15:12	um1p				0	Here the word “them” refers to Paul and Barnabas.
1492	15:12	d1uc			πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος	1	“Everyone” or “The whole group” (Acts 15:6)
1493	15:12	uks6			ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς	1	“God had done” or “God had caused”
1494	15:13	vb25				0	Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas (Acts 15:12).
1495	15:13	l7mp				0	James begins to speak to the apostles and elders (Acts 15:6).
1496	15:13	pl6m			ἀδελφοί, ἀκούσατέ	1	“Fellow believers, listen.” James was probably speaking only to men.
1497	15:14	abct			ἐπεσκέψατο, λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν	1	“graciously helped the Gentiles by taking out of them”
1498	15:14	s9dn			λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν λαὸν	1	“so that he might choose from among them a people”
1499	15:14	pnr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ	1	“for God’s name.” Here “name” refers to God. Alternate translation: “for himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1500	15:15	h9um				0	Here “I” refers to God who spoke through the words of his prophet.
1501	15:15	ibb2				0	James quotes the prophet Amos from the Old Testament.
1502	15:15	am6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	συμφωνοῦσιν οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν	1	Here “words” stands for a message. Alternate translation: “What the prophets said agrees” or “The prophets agree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1503	15:15	nbi1			τούτῳ συμφωνοῦσιν	1	“confirm this truth”
1504	15:15	j4f5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “as they wrote” or “as the prophet Amos wrote long ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1505	15:16	f5wf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν	1	This speaks of God’s again choosing one of David’s descendants to rule over his people as though he were setting up a tent again after it fell down. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1506	15:16	ist8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σκηνὴν	1	Here “tent” stands for David’s family. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1507	15:17	sm79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκζητήσωσιν οἱ κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὸν Κύριον	1	This speaks about people wanting to obey God and learn more about him as if they were literally looking for him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1508	15:17	hkw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Here “men” includes males and females. Alternate translation: “remnant of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1509	15:17	pe4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον	1	God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1510	15:17	tu21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “including all the Gentiles who belong to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1511	15:17	c8gm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	Here “my name” stands for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1512	15:18	tr27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωστὰ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1513	15:19	g3zx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “we” includes James, the apostles, and the elders. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1514	15:19	f6za				0	James finishes speaking to the apostles and elders. (See: Acts 15:2 and Acts 15:13)
1515	15:19	pyb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	You can make explicit in what way James does not want to trouble the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we should not require the Gentiles to become circumcised and obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1516	15:19	vr6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	A person who starts obeying God is spoken of as if the person is physically turning towards God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1517	15:20	wx8f			ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων, καὶ τῆς πορνείας, καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος	1	Sexual immorality, strangling animals, and consuming blood were often part of ceremonies to worship idols and false gods.
1518	15:20	n6f2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων	1	This possibly refers to eating the meat of an animal that someone has sacrificed to an idol or to anything to do with idol worship. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1519	15:20	j2rl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος	1	God did not allow Jews to eat meat that still had the blood in it. Also, even earlier in Moses’ writings in Genesis, God had forbidden the drinking of blood. Therefore, they could not eat an animal that someone strangled because the blood was not properly drained from the body of the animal. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1520	15:21	si1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος.	1	James is implying that Gentiles know how important these rules are because Jews preach them in every city where there is a synagogue. It also implies the Gentiles can go to the teachers from the synagogues to learn more about these rules. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1521	15:21	zd7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Μωϋσῆς & τοὺς κηρύσσοντας	1	Here “Moses” represents the law of Moses. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The law of Moses has been proclaimed” or “Jews have taught the law of Moses” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1522	15:21	xg5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	κατὰ πόλιν	1	The word “every” here is a generalization. Alternate translation: “in many cities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1523	15:21	pbm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀναγινωσκόμενος	1	Here “he” refers to Moses, whose name here represents his law. Alternate translation: “and the law is read” or “and they read the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1524	15:22	rhn3				0	Here the word “them” refers to Judas and Silas. The word “They” refers to the apostles, elders, and other believers of the church in Jerusalem.
1525	15:22	hp6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	Here “church” refers to the people who are a part of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “the whole community of believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1526	15:22	c711		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν	1	This is the name of a man. “Barsabbas” is a second name that people called him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1527	15:23	e4g2			οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν	1	This is the introduction of the letter. Your language may have a way of introducing the author of the letter and to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers”
1528	15:23	kp51			ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν	1	Here the word “brothers” refers to fellow believers. By using these words, the apostles and elders assure the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers.
1529	15:23	php8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κιλικίαν	1	This is the name of a province on the coast in Asia Minor north of the Island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1530	15:24	g8m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here all instances of “we,” “our,” and “us” refer to the believers in the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and Acts 15:22)
1531	15:24	p1tl			ὅτι τινὲς	1	“that some men”
1532	15:24	kh16			οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα	1	“even though we gave no orders for them to go”
1533	15:24	bxq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν	1	Here “souls” refers to the people. Alternate translation: “have taught things that have troubled you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1534	15:25	c3dl			ἐκλεξαμένοις ἄνδρας	1	The men they sent were Judas called Barsabbas and Silas (Acts 15:22).
1535	15:26	t7vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here “name” refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “because they believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” or “because they serve our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1536	15:27	j1jb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the words “We” and “us” refer to the leaders and believers in the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and Acts 15:22)
1537	15:27	v2ee				0	This concludes the letter from the Jerusalem church to the Gentile believers in Antioch.
1538	15:27	xw8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτοὺς διὰ λόγου ἀπαγγέλλοντας τὰ αὐτά	1	This phrase emphasizes that Judas and Silas will say the same things that the apostles and elders had written. Alternate translation: “who themselves will tell you the same things about which we have written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1539	15:28	l9z6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος, πλὴν τούτων τῶν ἐπάναγκες	1	This speaks about laws that people need to obey as if they were objects that people carry on their shoulders. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1540	15:29	nt7s			εἰδωλοθύτων	1	This means they are not allowed to eat the meat of an animal that someone sacrifices to an idol.
1541	15:29	vcc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αἵματος	1	This refers to drinking blood or eating meat from which the blood has not been drained. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1542	15:29	rt55			πνικτῶν	1	A strangled animal was killed but its blood was not drained.
1543	15:29	buy9			ἔρρωσθε	1	This announces the end of the letter. Alternate translation: “Goodbye”
1544	15:30	khi8				0	Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas leave for Antioch.
1545	15:30	c3uk			οἱ μὲν οὖν ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν	1	The word “they” refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. Alternate translation: “So when the four men were dismissed, they came down to Antioch”
1546	15:30	usz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπολυθέντες	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “when the apostles and elders dismissed the four men” or “when the believers in Jerusalem sent them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1547	15:30	t55a			κατῆλθον εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν	1	The phrase “came down” is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
1548	15:31	k1mr			ἀναγνόντες & ἐχάρησαν	1	“the believers in Antioch rejoiced”
1549	15:31	e4gf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει	1	The abstract noun “encouragement” can be expressed with the verb “encourage.” Alternate translation: “because what the apostles and elders wrote encouraged them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1550	15:32	r65l			καὶ & προφῆται	1	Prophets were teachers authorized by God to speak for him. Alternate translation: “because they were prophets” or “who were also prophets”
1551	15:32	e2en			τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	“the fellow believers”
1552	15:32	j99g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπεστήριξαν	1	Helping someone to depend even more on Jesus is spoken of as if they were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1553	15:33	y2ls				0	Judas and Silas return to Jerusalem while Paul and Barnabas remain in Antioch.
1554	15:33	v7pj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ποιήσαντες δὲ χρόνον	1	This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. The word “they” refers to Judas and Silas. Alternate translation: “After they stayed there for a while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1555	15:33	v6im		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent Judas and Silas back in peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1556	15:33	wzw4			τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	This refers to the believers in Antioch.
1557	15:33	xv3h			πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς	1	“to the believers in Jerusalem who sent Judas and Silas” (Acts 15:22)
1558	15:35	e7s4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here “word” stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1559	15:36	k6c6				0	Paul and Barnabas go on separate journeys.
1560	15:36	i1n5			ἐπιστρέψαντες δὴ	1	“I suggest we now return”
1561	15:36	ib2j			ἐπισκεψώμεθα τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	“care for the brothers” or “offer to help the believers”
1562	15:36	ua1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here “word” stands for the message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1563	15:36	y9i9			πῶς ἔχουσιν	1	“learn how they are doing.” They want to learn about the current condition of the brothers and how they are holding on to God’s truth.
1564	15:37	s635			συνπαραλαβεῖν καὶ τὸν Ἰωάννην, τὸν καλούμενον Μᾶρκον	1	“to take John, who was also called Mark”
1565	15:38	a5nn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	Παῦλος & ἠξίου & μὴ & συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον	1	The words “not good” are used to say the opposite of good. Alternate translation: “Paul thought that taking Mark would be bad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1566	15:38	ht3k			Παμφυλίας	1	This was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
1567	15:38	ln7w			μὴ συνελθόντα αὐτοῖς εἰς τὸ ἔργον	1	“did not continue to work with them then” or “did not continue to serve with them”
1568	15:39	bb8w				0	Here the word “they” refers to Barnabas and Paul.
1569	15:39	u97a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐγένετο δὲ παροξυσμὸς	1	The abstract noun “disagreement” can be stated as the verb “disagree.” Alternate translation: “They strongly disagreed with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1570	15:40	l2uq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παραδοθεὶς τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Κυρίου ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	To entrust to someone means to place the care and responsibility for someone or something to another person. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “after the believers in Antioch entrusted Paul to the grace of the Lord” or “after the believers in Antioch prayed for the Lord to take care of Paul and show kindness to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1571	15:41	e3ym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διήρχετο	1	The previous sentence implies that Silas was with Paul. Alternate translation: “they went” or “Paul and Silas went” or “Paul took Silas and went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1572	15:41	t81z			διήρχετο & τὴν Συρίαν καὶ τὴν Κιλικίαν	1	These are provinces or areas in Asia Minor, near the island of Cyprus.
1573	15:41	tbv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας	1	Encouraging the believers in the churches is spoken of as though Paul and Silas were making the believers physically stronger. The word “churches” refers to the groups of believers in Syria and Cilicia. Alternate translation: “encouraging the believers in the churches” or “helping the community of believers to depend even more in Jesus” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1574	16:intro	e7z2				0	Acts 16 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Timothy’s circumcision Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised. The woman who had a spirit of divination Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her.
1575	16:1	l2b1				0	The first, third, and fourth instances of the word “him” refer to Timothy. The second “him” refers to Paul.
1576	16:1	f49m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	This continues the missionary journeys of Paul with Silas. Timothy is introduced into the story and joins Paul and Silas. Verses 1 and 2 give background information about Timothy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1577	16:1	km5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	κατήντησεν & καὶ	1	Here “came” can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1578	16:1	d4ka			Δέρβην	1	This is the name of a city in Asia Minor. See how you translated it in Acts 14:6.
1579	16:1	u3vr			ἰδοὺ	1	The word “behold” alerts us to a new person in the narrative. Your language may have a way of doing this.
1580	16:1	wxl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πιστῆς	1	The words “in Christ” are understood. Alternate translation: “who believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1581	16:2	t1lu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν & ἀδελφῶν	1	This can be stated in active from. Alternate translation: “The brothers spoke well of him” or “Timothy had a good reputation among the brothers” or “The brothers said good things about him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1582	16:2	rez2			ὑπὸ τῶν & ἀδελφῶν	1	Here “brothers” refers to believers. Alternate translation: “by the believers”
1583	16:3	p6z8			περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν	1	It is possible that Paul himself circumcised Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise Timothy.
1584	16:3	za93			διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις	1	“because of the Jews living in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling”
1585	16:3	hk2l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν	1	Since Greek men did not have their sons circumcised, the Jews would have known Timothy was not circumcised, and they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1586	16:4	n46i				0	The word “they” here refers to Paul, Silas (Acts 15:40), and Timothy (Acts 16:3).
1587	16:4	bu6r			αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν	1	“for the church members to obey” or “for the believers to obey”
1588	16:4	gpi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1589	16:5	q8v9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αἱ & ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει, καὶ ἐπερίσσευον τῷ ἀριθμῷ καθ’ ἡμέραν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The believers became stronger in their faith, and there were more and more people becoming believers every day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1590	16:5	lv4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αἱ & ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει	1	This speaks of helping someone to believe more confidently as if it were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1591	16:6	g97e			τὴν Φρυγίαν	1	This is a region in Asia. See how you translated this name in Acts 2:10.
1592	16:6	ue3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1593	16:6	h4u4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Here “word” stands for “message.” Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1594	16:7	x1b1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλθόντες δὲ	1	Here “came” can be translated as “went” or “arrived.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1595	16:7	b1xq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μυσίαν & Βιθυνίαν	1	These are two more regions in Asia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1596	16:7	b539			τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ	1	“the Holy Spirit”
1597	16:8	s6l1			κατέβησαν εἰς Τρῳάδα	1	The phrase “came down” is used here because Troas is lower in elevation than Mysia.
1598	16:8	xq6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	κατέβησαν	1	Here “came” can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1599	16:9	t6v2			ὅραμα & τῷ Παύλῳ ὤφθη	1	“Paul saw a vision from God” or “Paul had a vision from God”
1600	16:9	hq8e			παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν	1	“begging him” or “inviting him”
1601	16:9	cm2u			διαβὰς εἰς Μακεδονίαν	1	The phrase “Come over” is used because Macedonia is across the sea from Troas.
1602	16:10	fg5h			ἐζητήσαμεν ἐξελθεῖν εἰς Μακεδονίαν, συμβιβάζοντες ὅτι προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εὐαγγελίσασθαι αὐτούς	1	Here the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul and his companions including Luke, the author of Acts.
1603	16:11	m2p5				0	Paul and his companions are now in Philippi on their missionary trip. Verse 13 begins the story of Lydia. This short story happens during Paul’s travels.
1604	16:11	q2pr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαμοθρᾴκην & Νέαν Πόλιν	1	These are coastal cities near Phillipi in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1605	16:11	yy6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	εἰς Νέαν Πόλιν	1	Here “came to” can be translated as “went to” or “arrived at.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1606	16:12	tl9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κολωνία	1	This is a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1607	16:14	x8bp				0	This ends the story of Lydia.
1608	16:14	n952		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία	1	Here “A certain woman” introduces a new person in the story. Alternate translation: “There was a woman named Lydia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1609	16:14	qj86		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πορφυρόπωλις	1	Here “cloth” is understood. Alternate translation: “a merchant who sold purple cloth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1610	16:14	c6n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Θυατείρων	1	This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1611	16:14	cyk3			σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν	1	A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him, but does not obey all of the Jewish laws.
1612	16:14	rd4r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν, προσέχειν	1	For the Lord to cause someone to pay attention and believe a message is spoken of as if he were opening a person’s heart. Alternate translation: “The Lord caused her to listen well and to believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1613	16:14	s9ju		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἧς & διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν	1	Here “heart” stands for a person’s mind. Also, the author speaks about the “heart” or “mind” as if it were a box that a person could open so it is ready for someone to fill it. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1614	16:14	a74y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “what Paul said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1615	16:15	g7e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “When they baptized Lydia and members of her household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1616	16:15	s799		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς	1	Here “house” represents the people who live in her house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1617	16:16	vyn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Background information is given here to explain that this young fortune teller brought much financial gain to her masters by guessing people’s futures. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1618	16:16	anc1				0	This begins the first event in another short story during Paul’s travels; it is about a young fortune teller.
1619	16:16	ufy4			ἐγένετο δὲ	1	This phrase marks the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
1620	16:16	y1gc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	παιδίσκην τινὰ	1	The phrase “a certain” introduces a new person to the story. Alternate translation: “there was a young woman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1621	16:16	ymt9			πνεῦμα Πύθωνα	1	An evil spirit spoke to her often about the immediate future of people.
1622	16:17	tni9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁδὸν σωτηρίας	1	How a person can be saved is spoken of here as if it were a way or path that a person walks on. Alternate translation: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1623	16:18	lj79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “But she greatly annoyed Paul so he turned around” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1624	16:18	qi1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here “name” stands for speaking with the authority or as the representative of Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1625	16:18	u4z8			ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	“the spirit came out immediately”
1626	16:19	m1y7			οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς	1	“the owners of the slave girl”
1627	16:19	r1a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἰδόντες & οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν	1	It can be stated clearly why they no longer hoped to make money. Alternate translation: “When her masters saw that she could no longer earn money for them by telling fortunes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1628	16:19	bws7			εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν	1	“into the public square.” This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services takes place.
1629	16:19	hf82			ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας	1	“into the presence of the authorities” or “so that the authorities could judge them”
1630	16:20	d2rg			καὶ προσαγαγόντες αὐτοὺς τοῖς στρατηγοῖς	1	“When they had brought them to the judges”
1631	16:20	wa94			στρατηγοῖς	1	rulers, judges
1632	16:20	dkz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν	1	Here the word “our” refers to the people of the city and includes the magistrates who ruled it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1633	16:21	gna6			παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν	1	“to believe or to obey” or “to accept or to do”
1634	16:22	r1gr				0	Here the words “their” and “them” refer to Paul and Silas. The word “they” here refers to soldiers.
1635	16:22	at6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “commanded the soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1636	16:23	dsr3			πολλάς & ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς	1	“had hit them many times with rods”
1637	16:23	y4mc			παραγγείλαντες τῷ δεσμοφύλακι ἀσφαλῶς τηρεῖν αὐτούς	1	“told the jailer to make sure they did not get out”
1638	16:23	zkp7			δεσμοφύλακι	1	a person responsible for all the people held in the jail or prison
1639	16:24	a79x			ὃς παραγγελίαν τοιαύτην λαβὼν	1	“he heard this command”
1640	16:24	rl8c			τοὺς πόδας ἠσφαλίσατο αὐτῶν εἰς τὸ ξύλον	1	“securely locked their feet in the stocks”
1641	16:24	jug6			ξύλον	1	a piece of wood with holes for preventing a person’s feet from moving
1642	16:25	rwu3				0	The word “them” refers to Paul and Silas.
1643	16:25	hme2				0	This continues Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi in prison and tells what happens to their jailer.
1644	16:26	q7z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σεισμὸς & ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “earthquake which shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1645	16:26	m4ye		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου	1	When the foundations shook, this caused the entire prison to shake. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1646	16:26	s6mu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠνεῴχθησαν & αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1647	16:26	p393		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone’s chains came loose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1648	16:27	ljy6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1649	16:27	hr9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔξυπνος & γενόμενος ὁ δεσμοφύλαξ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The jailer woke up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1650	16:27	cwt5			ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν	1	“was ready to kill himself.” The jailer preferred to commit suicide rather than suffer the consequences of letting the prisoners escape.
1651	16:29	pe66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αἰτήσας & φῶτα	1	The reason why the jailer needed light can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1652	16:29	h5ai		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	φῶτα	1	The word “lights” stands for something that makes light. Alternate translation: “for torches” or “for lamps” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1653	16:29	r6is			εἰσεπήδησεν	1	“quickly entered the jail”
1654	16:29	bb6t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ	1	The jailer humbled himself by bowing down at the feet of Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1655	16:30	a3h6			προαγαγὼν αὐτοὺς ἔξω	1	“led them outside the jail”
1656	16:30	u132		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τί με δεῖ ποιεῖν, ἵνα σωθῶ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “what must I do for God to save me from my sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1657	16:31	br4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσῃ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” or “God will save you from your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1658	16:31	w8ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ οἶκός σου	1	Here “house” stands for the people who live in the house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1659	16:32	kb35				0	Here the first use of the word “they” as well as the words “their” and “them” refer to Paul and Silas. Compare Acts 16:25. The last use of the word “they” refers to the people in the jailers’ household. The words “him,” “his,” and “he” refer to the jailer.
1660	16:32	pq5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐλάλησαν αὐτῷ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here “word” stands for a message. Alternate translation: “They told him the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1661	16:33	r3la		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθη, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ αὐτοῦ πάντες παραχρῆμα	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas baptized the jailer and all the members of his household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1662	16:35	x3x8				0	This is the last event in the story of Paul and Silas in Philippi (Acts 16:12).
1663	16:35	lb4z			δὲ	1	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in Acts 16:16.
1664	16:35	qum8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπέστειλαν & τοὺς ῥαβδούχους	1	Here “word” stands for “message” or “command.” Alternate translation: “sent a message to the guards” or “sent a command to the guards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1665	16:35	j5m6			ἀπέστειλαν	1	Here “sent” means the magistrates told someone to go tell the guards their message.
1666	16:35	vev9			ἀπόλυσον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνους	1	“Release those men” or “Allow those men to leave”
1667	16:36	k3i6			ἐξελθόντες	1	“come outside of the jail”
1668	16:37	v4yk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	All of the times the word “they” is used and the first time “them” is used, the words refer to the magistrates. The word “themselves” refers to the magistrates. The second time the word “them” is used, it refers to Paul and Silas. The word “us” refers only to Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1669	16:37	b4jm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔφη πρὸς αὐτούς	1	Probably Paul is speaking to the jailer, but he intends for the jailer to tell the magistrates what he says. Alternate translation: “said to the jailer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1670	16:37	b7cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ	1	Here “They” refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: “The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1671	16:37	wc37			ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν	1	“men who are Roman citizens, and they had their soldiers put us in jail though they had not proven in court that we were guilty”
1672	16:37	qq1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? οὔ	1	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he will not allow the magistrates to send them out the city in secret after they had mistreated Paul and Silas. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not let them send us out of the city in secret!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1673	16:37	jr2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? οὔ	1	Here “themselves” is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1674	16:38	ym2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφοβήθησαν & ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν	1	To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1675	16:40	q59h				0	Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Silas. The word “them” refers to the believers in Philippi.
1676	16:40	y14i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	This is the end of Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
1677	16:40	t1pf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	εἰσῆλθον πρὸς τὴν Λυδίαν	1	Here “came” can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1678	16:40	ylk9			τὴν Λυδίαν	1	“the home of Lydia”
1679	16:40	ntc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἰδόντες	1	Here “brothers” refers to believers whether male or female. Alternate translation: “saw the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1680	17:intro	gj4c				0	Acts 17 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Misunderstandings about the Messiah The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]]) The religion of Athens Paul said that the Athenians were “religious,” but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]]) In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.
1681	17:1	q9x4				0	Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Silas. Compare Acts 16:40. The word “them” refers to the Jews at the synagogue in Thessalonica.
1682	17:1	r3qb				0	This continues the story of Paul, Silas, and Timothy’s missionary trip. They arrive in Thessalonica, apparently without Luke, since he says “they” and not “we.”
1683	17:1	e4w5			δὲ	1	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke, the author, starts to tell a new part of the story.
1684	17:1	b7np			διοδεύσαντες	1	“traveled through”
1685	17:1	kll1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν	1	These are coastal cities in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1686	17:1	yj66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον εἰς Θεσσαλονίκην	1	Here “came” can be translated as “went” or “arrived.” Alternate translation: “they came to the city” or “they arrived at the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1687	17:2	vbf2			κατὰ & τὸ εἰωθὸς	1	“as his habit was” or “as his common practice was.” Paul usually went to the synagogue on the Sabbath when Jews would be present.
1688	17:2	bt5e			ἐπὶ Σάββατα τρία	1	“on each Sabbath day for three weeks”
1689	17:2	wp3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν Γραφῶν	1	Paul explained what the scriptures means in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1690	17:2	qf4t			διελέξατο αὐτοῖς	1	“gave them reasons” or “debated with them” or “discussed with them”
1691	17:3	e85n				0	Here the word “He” refers to Paul (Acts 17:2).
1692	17:3	ir9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διανοίγων	1	Possible meanings are (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1693	17:3	he78			ἔδει	1	“it was part of God’s plan”
1694	17:3	ipb2			ἀναστῆναι	1	“to come back to life”
1695	17:3	b9qi			ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
1696	17:4	es2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Jews believed” or “the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1697	17:4	nyp2			προσεκληρώθησαν τῷ Παύλῳ	1	“became associated with Paul”
1698	17:4	t21z			σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων	1	This refers to Greeks who worship God but have not converted to Judaism through circumcision.
1699	17:4	ye8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	γυναικῶν & τῶν πρώτων οὐκ ὀλίγαι	1	This is an understatement to emphasize that many leading women joined them. Alternate translation: “many leading women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1700	17:5	nuh6				0	Here the word “they” refers to the unbelieving Jews and wicked men from the marketplace.
1701	17:5	uj43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ζηλώσαντες	1	The feeling of jealousy is spoken of as if jealousy were actually moving the person. Alternate translation: “feeling very jealous” or “feeling very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1702	17:5	vev6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζηλώσαντες	1	It can be stated explicitly that these Jews were jealous because some of the Jews and Greeks believed Paul’s message. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1703	17:5	btw6			προσλαβόμενοι & ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς	1	Here “took” does not mean the Jews took these people by force. It means the Jews persuaded these wicked men to help them.
1704	17:5	lc6g			ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς	1	“some evil men.” The word “men” here refers specifically to males.
1705	17:5	ie1f			τῶν ἀγοραίων	1	“from the public square.” This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place.
1706	17:5	t3bc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν	1	Here “the city” stands for the people in the city. Alternate translation: “caused the people of the city to be in an uproar” or “caused the people of the city to riot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1707	17:5	s3uv			ἐπιστάντες τῇ οἰκίᾳ	1	“Violently attacking the house.” This probably means the people were throwing rocks at the house and trying to break down the door of the house.
1708	17:5	ks2l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰάσονος	1	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1709	17:5	abcu			αὐτοὺς προαγαγεῖν	1	“to bring Paul and Silas out”
1710	17:5	pp7k			προαγαγεῖν εἰς τὸν δῆμον	1	Possible meanings or “people” are (1) a governmental or legal group of citizens gathered to make a decision or (2) a mob.
1711	17:6	i79p			τινας ἀδελφοὺς	1	Here “brothers” refers to believers. Alternate translation: “some other believers”
1712	17:6	e44z			ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας	1	“in the presence of the officials”
1713	17:6	g7xj			οἱ & ἀναστατώσαντες, οὗτοι	1	The Jewish leaders were speaking and the phrase, “These men,” refers to Paul and Silas.
1714	17:6	c2av		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες	1	This phrase is another way of saying Paul and Silas where causing trouble everywhere they went. The Jewish leaders were exaggerating the influence Paul and Silas were having with their teaching. Alternate translation: “caused trouble everywhere in the world” or “caused trouble everywhere they have gone” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1715	17:7	hlc9			ὑποδέδεκται Ἰάσων	1	This phrase signals that Jason was in agreement with the apostles’ troubling message.
1716	17:8	th2f			ἐτάραξαν	1	“were worried”
1717	17:9	ya44			λαβόντες τὸ ἱκανὸν παρὰ τοῦ Ἰάσονος καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν	1	Jason and the others had to pay the money to the city officials as a promise of good behavior; that money might be returned if all went well or it might be used to repair the damages brought on by bad behavior.
1718	17:9	bj48			τῶν λοιπῶν	1	The words “the rest” refers to other believers that the Jews brought before the officials.
1719	17:9	aru6			ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς	1	“the officials let Jason and the other believers go”
1720	17:10	na8h				0	Paul and Silas travel on to the town of Berea.
1721	17:10	qy5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ	1	The word “brothers” here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1722	17:11	k2st		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	The word “now” is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about the people in Berea and how they were willing to listen to Paul and examine what he said. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1723	17:11	gu6s			οὗτοι & ἦσαν εὐγενέστεροι	1	These “well-born” people were willing to think more objectively about new ideas than other people. Alternate translation: “more open minded” or “more willing to listen”
1724	17:11	hle3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον	1	Here “word” refers to a teaching. Alternate translation: “listened to the teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1725	17:11	uh8a			μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας	1	These Bereans were prepared to examine earnestly Paul’s teachings about the scripture.
1726	17:11	lzm3			καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνακρίνοντες τὰς Γραφὰς	1	“carefully reading and evaluating the scriptures every day”
1727	17:11	g8an			ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως	1	“the things Paul said were true”
1728	17:12	abcv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι	1	This is an understatement to emphasize that many men believed the message. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1729	17:13	vn8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names		0	Athens is down the coast from Barea which is in Macedonia. Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1730	17:13	asb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἦλθον κἀκεῖ, σαλεύοντες	1	This speaks about their agitating people as though it were a person stirring a liquid and causing the things at the bottom of the liquid to rise to the surface. Alternate translation: “went there and agitated” or “went there and disturbed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1731	17:13	wjq3			ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους	1	“and worried the crowds” or “caused dread and fear among the people”
1732	17:14	ael8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὶ	1	The word “brothers” here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1733	17:14	zw1c			πορεύεσθαι ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν	1	“to go to the coast.” From here Paul would probably sail to another city.
1734	17:15	tjh5			καθιστάνοντες τὸν Παῦλον	1	“who were accompanying Paul” or “who were going along with Paul”
1735	17:15	gs1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	λαβόντες ἐντολὴν πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον	1	“he told them to instruct Silas and Timothy.” This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1736	17:16	wk63				0	This is another part of the story of Paul and Silas’ travels. Paul is now in Athens where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him.
1737	17:16	y9cr			δὲ	1	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.
1738	17:16	we78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν	1	Here “spirit” stands for Paul himself. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he became upset because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city” or “seeing the idols everywhere in the city upset him” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1739	17:17	q8px			διελέγετο	1	“he debated” or “he discussed.” This means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well.
1740	17:17	jkj8			τοῖς σεβομένοις	1	This refers to Gentiles (non-Jews) who give praise to God and follow him but do not obey all of the Jewish laws.
1741	17:17	ec14			ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ	1	“in the public square.” This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place.
1742	17:18	ru6a				0	Here the words “him,” “He, “and “he” refer to Paul.
1743	17:18	l7le		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἐπικουρίων καὶ Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων	1	These people believed all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1744	17:18	f976		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων	1	These people believed freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1745	17:18	tjk6			συνέβαλλον αὐτῷ	1	“happened upon him”
1746	17:18	dnj8			τινες ἔλεγον	1	“Some of the philosophers said”
1747	17:18	g4bv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τί ἂν θέλοι ὁ σπερμολόγος οὗτος	1	The word “babbler” was used to refer to birds picking up seeds as food. It refers negatively to a person who only knows a little bit of information. The philosophers said Paul had bits of information which were not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “What is this uneducated person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1748	17:18	k2ps			οἱ	1	“Other philosophers said”
1749	17:18	l41t			δοκεῖ καταγγελεὺς	1	“He seems to be a proclaimer” or “He seems to be on a mission to add people to his philosophy”
1750	17:18	sx9t			ξένων δαιμονίων	1	This is not in the sense of “odd,” but in the sense of “foreign,” that is, gods that Greeks and Romans do not worship or know about.
1751	17:19	fs5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The words “him,” “He” and “you” refer to Paul (Acts 17:18). Here the words “They” and “we” refer to the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1752	17:19	mv8c			ἐπιλαβόμενοί τε αὐτοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον ἤγαγον	1	This does not mean they arrested Paul. The philosophers invited Paul to speak formally to their leaders.
1753	17:19	b56g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον	1	The “Areopagus” was the place where the leaders met. Alternate translation: “to the leaders that met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1754	17:19	ze7e			τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον & λέγοντες	1	Here the leaders on the Areopagus are speaking. This can stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the Areopagus. The leaders said to Paul”
1755	17:19	unc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἄρειον Πάγον	1	This is a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens upon which the supreme court of Athens may have met. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1756	17:20	lay8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν	1	Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. Here “ears” refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: “For you teachings some things that we have never heard before” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1757	17:21	dn1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	Ἀθηναῖοι δὲ πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι	1	The word “all” is a generalization referring to many. Alternate translation: “Now many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” or “Now many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1758	17:21	d8yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀθηναῖοι & πάντες	1	“Athenians” are people from Athens, a city near the coast below Macedonia (present day Greece). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1759	17:21	m8u1			οἱ & ξένοι	1	“the foreigners”
1760	17:21	sk5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν, ἢ λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν	1	Here “time” is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “used their time doing nothing but either telling or listening” or “were always doing nothing but telling or listening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1761	17:21	ij4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν, ἢ λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν	1	The phrase “spent their time in nothing” is an exaggeration. Alternate translation: “did not do much but tell or listen” or “spent much of their time telling or listening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1762	17:21	wr1r			λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν τι καινότερον	1	“discussing new philosophical ideas” or “talking about what was new to them”
1763	17:22	zq3y				0	Paul begins his speech to the philosophers on the Areopagus.
1764	17:22	ja1k			κατὰ πάντα & δεισιδαιμονεστέρους	1	Paul is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices.
1765	17:23	gn1j			διερχόμενος γὰρ	1	“Because as I walked past” or “I walked along”
1766	17:23	cem7			ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ	1	Possible meanings are (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar.
1767	17:24	m1jm			τὸν κόσμον	1	In the most general sense, the “world” refers to the heavens and the earth and everything in them.
1768	17:24	rqk9			οὗτος & ὑπάρχων Κύριος	1	“because he is the Lord.” Here “he” is referring to the unknown god mentioned in Acts 17:23 that Paul is explaining is the Lord God.
1769	17:24	f2mz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς	1	The words “heaven” and “earth” are used together to mean all beings and things in heaven and earth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1770	17:24	ju4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	χειροποιήτοις	1	Here “hands” stands for people. Alternate translation: “built by the hands of people” or “that people built” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1771	17:25	e3dg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται	1	Here “served” has the sense of a doctor treating a patient to make the patient well again. Alternate translation: “Neither do men’s hands take care of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1772	17:25	yq68		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων	1	Here “hands” stands for the whole person. Alternate translation: “by humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1773	17:25	sj89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς διδοὺς	1	“because he himself.” The word “himself” is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1774	17:26	r3lt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the words “he” and “him” refer to the one true God, the creator. The words “their” and “them” refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth. In using the word “us,” Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1775	17:26	p1e4			ἑνὸς	1	This means Adam, the first person God created. This can be stated to include Eve. It was through Adam and Eve that God made all other people. Alternate translation: “one couple”
1776	17:26	js4p			ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιροὺς καὶ τὰς ὁροθεσίας τῆς κατοικίας αὐτῶν	1	This can be stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “And he determined when and where they would live”
1777	17:27	jae5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν, εἰ ἄρα γε ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν	1	Here “search for God” represents desiring to know him, and “feel their way toward him and find him” represents praying and having a relationship with him. Alternate translation: “so that they should want to know God and perhaps pray to him and become one of his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1778	17:27	p8hk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	καί γε οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα	1	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “Yet he is very near to everyone of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1779	17:28	tkd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the words “him” and “his” refer to God (Acts 17:24). When Paul says “we” here, he includes himself as well as his hearers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1780	17:28	cbd9			ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ	1	“Because of him”
1781	17:29	k9ws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γένος & ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Because God created everyone, all people are spoken of as if they were God’s literal children. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1782	17:29	czi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ θεῖον	1	Here “deity” refers to God’s nature or attributes. Alternate translation: “that God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1783	17:29	q4q2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “which a man then uses his skill to make it into something that he has designed” or “images that people make by using their art and imagination” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1784	17:30	y2u8				0	Here the word “he” refers to God.
1785	17:30	zj28				0	Paul finishes his speech to the philosophers in the Areopagus, which he began in Acts 17:22.
1786	17:30	suh6			οὖν	1	“Because what I have just said is true”
1787	17:30	iva4			χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας ὑπεριδὼν ὁ Θεὸς	1	“God decided not to punish people during the time of ignorance”
1788	17:30	h8uy			χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας	1	This refers to the time before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God.
1789	17:30	qim5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας	1	This means all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1790	17:31	htp7			ἐν ᾗ μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ, ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν	1	“when the man he has chosen will judge the world in righteousness”
1791	17:31	jt3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	Here “world” refers to the people. Alternate translation: “he will judge all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1792	17:31	i9aw			ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ	1	“justly” or “fairly”
1793	17:31	l61p			πίστιν παρασχὼν	1	“God has demonstrated his choice of this man”
1794	17:31	ulr4			ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
1795	17:32	tc8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “We” refers to the men of Athens but not to Paul, so this is exclusive. Though some of them probably did want to hear Paul again, they may only have been being polite. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1796	17:32	c4sm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
1797	17:32	nb26			δὲ	1	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke shifts from Paul’s teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens.
1798	17:32	jlm5			ἀκούσαντες	1	These are the people who were present at the Areopagus listening to Paul.
1799	17:32	sn6j			οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον	1	“some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul.” These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life.
1800	17:34	psh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης	1	Dionysius is a man’s name. Areopagite implies that Dionysius was one of the judges at the council of Areopagus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1801	17:34	hsz3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δάμαρις	1	This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1802	18:intro	rky6				0	Acts 18 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter The baptism of John Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
1803	18:1	jat1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Aquila and Priscilla are introduced to the story and verses 2 and 3 give background information about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1804	18:1	qa9b				0	This is another part of the story of Paul’s travels as he goes to Corinth.
1805	18:1	fky7			μετὰ ταῦτα	1	“After these events took place in Athens”
1806	18:1	abcw			χωρισθεὶς	1	“Paul departed”
1807	18:1	h2si			ἐκ τῶν Ἀθηνῶν	1	Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. See how you translated this in Acts 17:15.
1808	18:2	d9zx			καὶ εὑρών	1	Possible meanings are that (1) Paul happened to find by chance or (2) Paul intentionally found.
1809	18:2	hm16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν	1	Here the phrase “a certain” indicates this is introducing new person in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1810	18:2	y97p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει	1	Pontus was a province on the southern coast of the Black Sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1811	18:2	q4va			προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα	1	This is probably sometime in the past year.
1812	18:2	n631		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Ἰταλίας	1	This is the name of land. Rome is the capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1813	18:2	n95f			τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον	1	Claudius was the current Roman emperor. See how you translated this in Acts 11:28.
1814	18:3	q259			τὸ ὁμότεχνον εἶναι	1	“he did the same kind of work that they did”
1815	18:4	r56h				0	Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul.
1816	18:4	h3az			διελέγετο δὲ	1	“So Paul debated” or “So Paul discussed.” He gave reasons. This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people.
1817	18:4	r2gp			ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας	1	Possible meanings are (1) “He caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “He kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.”
1818	18:5	d191		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Spirit compelled Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1819	18:6	ncx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια	1	This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1820	18:6	z12a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν	1	Here “blood” stands for the guilt of their actions. Here “heads” refers to the whole person. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1821	18:7	cd3u				0	Here the word “he” refers to Paul. The first word “his” refers to Titius Justus. The second word “his” refers to Crispus.
1822	18:7	vs6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τιτίου Ἰούστου	1	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1823	18:7	v8xg			σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν	1	A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him but does not necessarily obey all of the Jewish laws.
1824	18:8	lj2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κρίσπος	1	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1825	18:8	kkk9			ἀρχισυνάγωγος	1	a layperson who sponsored and administered the synagogue, not necessarily the teacher
1826	18:8	uaq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ	1	Here “house” refers to the people who lived together. Alternate translation: “the people who lived with him in his house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1827	18:8	t3np		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “received baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1828	18:9	ws7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	μὴ φοβοῦ, ἀλλὰ λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	The Lord is giving one command in two different ways to emphasize that Paul should certainly continue preaching. Alternate translation: “You must not be afraid and, instead, continue to speak and not become silent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1829	18:9	zg8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	The Lord gives the same command in two different ways to strongly command Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1830	18:9	a529		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	It can be stated explicitly what the Lord wants Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “do not stop speaking about the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1831	18:10	a8lq			λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ	1	“there are many people in this city who have put their faith in me” or “many people in this city will put their faith in me”
1832	18:11	mqx2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	ἐκάθισεν δὲ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ μῆνας ἓξ, διδάσκων ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. “Word of God” here is a synecdoche for the entire scriptures. Alternate translation: “Paul lived there … teaching the scriptures among them” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1833	18:12	f41k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names		0	Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1834	18:12	b5bf				0	The unbelieving Jews bring Paul to the judgment seat before Gallio.
1835	18:12	se8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γαλλίωνος	1	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1836	18:12	j762		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	This stands for the Jewish leaders that did not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1837	18:12	lp79			κατεπέστησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	“came together” or “joined together”
1838	18:12	u36c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα	1	The Jews took Paul by force to bring Paul before the court. Here “judgment seat” refers to the place where Gallio sat when he made legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “took him so that the governor could judge him at the judgment seat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1839	18:14	d13b			εἶπεν ὁ Γαλλίων	1	Gallio was the Roman governor of the Province.
1840	18:15	y6mt			νόμου τοῦ καθ’ ὑμᾶς	1	Here “law” refers to the law of Moses and as well as the Jewish customs of Paul’s time.
1841	18:15	khr5			κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶναι	1	“I refuse to make a judgment about these matters”
1842	18:16	yf81				0	Here the word “they” probably refers to the Gentiles at the court. They reacted against the Jews who had brought Paul before the judgment seat (Acts 18:12).
1843	18:16	d6nh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος	1	“Gallio dismissed them from the judgment seat.” Here “judgment seat” refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1844	18:17	cyk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐπιλαβόμενοι & πάντες	1	This may be an exaggeration to emphasize the strong feelings the people had. Alternate translation: “many people seized” or “many of them grabbed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1845	18:17	mj77			ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος	1	Possible meanings are (1) the Gentiles beat Sosthenes in the court in front of the judgment seat because he was the Jewish leader or (2) it is possible that Sosthenes was a believer in Christ, so the Jews beat him in front of the court.
1846	18:17	x9w5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον	1	“Sosthenes” was the Jewish ruler of the synagogue at Corinth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1847	18:17	z9fv			ἔτυπτον	1	“repeatedly hit him” or “repeatedly punched him.”
1848	18:18	x25w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names		0	Here the word “he” refers to Paul. Cenchreae was a seaport that was part of the greater Corinth city area. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1849	18:18	ura9				0	This continues Paul’s missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain since it says “he” here and not “we.” The word “they” refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila.
1850	18:18	et8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἀποταξάμενος	1	The word “brothers” refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “left the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1851	18:18	v5kl			ἐξέπλει εἰς τὴν Συρίαν, καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας	1	Paul got on a ship that sailed for Syria. Priscilla and Aquila went with him.
1852	18:18	kq6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κειράμενος & τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν	1	This is a symbolic action that indicates the completion of a vow. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he had someone cut off the hair on his head” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1853	18:19	abcx			κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν	1	“Paul left Priscilla and Aquilla”
1854	18:19	st93			διελέξατο τοῖς	1	“discussed with” or “debated with”
1855	18:20	u44s				0	Here the words “they” and “them” refer to the Jews in Ephesus.
1856	18:21	iz1u			ἀποταξάμενος	1	“saying good-bye to them”
1857	18:22	pr6u				0	Phrygia is a province in Asia which is now modern day Turkey. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
1858	18:22	p364				0	Paul continues his missionary journey.
1859	18:22	gyy4			κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	“arrived at Caesarea.” The word “landed” is used to show that he arrived by ship.
1860	18:22	r26z			ἀναβὰς	1	He traveled to the city of Jerusalem. The phrase “went up” is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
1861	18:22	q9j6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀσπασάμενος τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1	Here “church” refers to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “greeted the members of the church of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1862	18:22	n3rh			κατέβη	1	The phrase “went down” is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
1863	18:23	pww5			ἐξῆλθεν	1	“Paul went away” or “Paul left”
1864	18:23	h65j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ποιήσας χρόνον τινὰ	1	This speaks about “time” as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. Alternate translation: After staying there for a while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1865	18:24	a7p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Apollos is introduced to the story. Verses 24 and 25 give background information about him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1866	18:24	muc2				0	Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with Priscilla and Aquila.
1867	18:24	xqy7			δέ	1	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line.
1868	18:24	n2b4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Ἰουδαῖος & τις Ἀπολλῶς ὀνόματι	1	The phrase “a certain” indicates that Luke is introducing a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1869	18:24	di14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀλεξανδρεὺς τῷ γένει	1	“a man who was born in the city of Alexandria.” This was a city in Egypt on the north coast of Africa. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1870	18:24	t4zi			λόγιος	1	“a good speaker”
1871	18:24	bh25			δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς	1	“he knew the scriptures thoroughly.” He understood the Old Testament writings well.
1872	18:25	z7a8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught Apollos how the Lord Jesus wanted people to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1873	18:25	ift8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	καὶ ζέων τῷ πνεύματι	1	Here “spirit” refers to the entire person of Apollos. Alternate translation: “Being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1874	18:25	lr1h			τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου	1	“The baptism that John performed.” This is comparing John’s baptism which was with water to Jesus’ baptism which is with the Holy Spirit.
1875	18:26	ga6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	How God wants people to live is spoken of as if it were a road that a person travels. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1876	18:26	k1lb			ἀκριβέστερον	1	“correctly” or “more fully”
1877	18:27	c2sq				0	Here the he words “he” and “him” refer to Apollos (Acts 18:24).
1878	18:27	ll36			διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν	1	“to go to the region of Achaia.” The phrase “pass over” is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus.
1879	18:27	pql7			τὴν Ἀχαΐαν	1	Achaia was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in Acts 18:12.
1880	18:27	v2i6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὶ	1	The word “brothers” here refers to men and women believers. You can make explicit that these are believers in Ephesus. Alternate translation: “fellow believers in Ephesus” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1881	18:27	q5f2			ἔγραψαν τοῖς μαθηταῖς	1	“wrote a letter to the Christians in Achaia”
1882	18:27	f99p			τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος	1	“those who had believed in salvation by grace” or “those who by God’s grace believed in Jesus”
1883	18:28	l2zt			εὐτόνως & τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις διακατηλέγχετο δημοσίᾳ	1	“In public debate Apollos powerfully showed that the Jews were wrong”
1884	18:28	v4sx			ἐπιδεικνὺς διὰ τῶν Γραφῶν εἶναι τὸν Χριστὸν, Ἰησοῦν	1	“as he showed them by the scriptures that Jesus is the Christ”
1885	19:intro	g38y				0	Acts 19 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Baptism John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus’ followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus. Temple of Diana The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.
1886	19:1	rhv1				0	The “upper country” was an area of Asia which today is part of modern-day Turkey to the north of Ephesus. Paul must have traveled by land around the top of the Aegean sea in order to come to Ephesus (also in Turkey today) which is directly east of Corinth by sea.
1887	19:1	wu6p				0	Paul travels to Ephesus.
1888	19:1	lp23			ἐγένετο δὲ	1	This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
1889	19:1	ati9			διελθόντα	1	“traveled through”
1890	19:2	wqi4			Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε	1	This means to have the Holy Spirit come upon them.
1891	19:2	nvn4			οὐδ’ εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἔστιν ἠκούσαμεν	1	“we have not even heard about the Holy Spirit”
1892	19:3	hml1				0	Here the words “They,” “you,” and “they” refer to certain disciples in the city of Ephesus (Acts 19:1). The word “him” refers to John.
1893	19:3	mrm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “What kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1894	19:3	jzp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα	1	You can translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism about which John taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1895	19:4	r46y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	βάπτισμα μετανοίας	1	You can translate the abstract noun “repentance” as the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1896	19:4	pv7t			τὸν ἐρχόμενον	1	Here “the one” refers to Jesus.
1897	19:4	q5fh			τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετ’ αὐτὸν	1	This means to come after John the Baptist in time and not following after him physically.
1898	19:5	zx2b				0	Paul continues staying in Ephesus.
1899	19:5	k9st			ἀκούσαντες δὲ	1	Here “people” refers to the disciples in Ephesus who were talking with Paul (Acts 19:1),
1900	19:5	ueh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1901	19:5	g2dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here “name” refers to Jesus’ power and authority. Alternate translation: “as believers in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1902	19:6	gk8l			ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας	1	“placed his hands on them.” He probably placed his hands on their shoulders or heads. Alternate translation: “placed his hands on their heads as he prayed”
1903	19:6	j4n8			ἐλάλουν τε γλώσσαις καὶ ἐπροφήτευον	1	Unlike in Acts 2:3-4, there are no details of who understood their messages.
1904	19:7	e7kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἦσαν δὲ οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα	1	This tells how many men were baptized. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1905	19:7	u71i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	ἄνδρες & δώδεκα	1	“12 men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
1906	19:8	qv8z			εἰσελθὼν & εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν, ἐπαρρησιάζετο ἐπὶ μῆνας τρεῖς	1	“Paul regularly attended the synagogue meetings for three months and spoke there boldly”
1907	19:8	yky2			διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων	1	“convincing people with convincing arguments and with clear teaching”
1908	19:8	v8et		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here “kingdom” stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “about God’s rule as king” or “about how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1909	19:9	mq1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τινες ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν	1	To stubbornly refuse to believe is spoken of as though the people were becoming hard and unable to move. Alternate translation: “some Jews were stubborn and did not believe” or “some Jews stubbornly refused to accept and obey the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1910	19:9	n6ir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κακολογοῦντες τὴν ὁδὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ πλήθους	1	What Christ wants people to believe is spoken of as though it were a road that a person travels. The phrase, “the Way,” seems to have been a title for Christianity at the time. Alternate translation: “to speak evil about Christianity to the crowd” or “to speak to the crowd evil things about those who follow Christ and who obey his teaching about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and Acts 9:2)
1911	19:9	ts8d			κακολογοῦντες	1	“to speak bad things about”
1912	19:9	xsm6			ἐν τῇ σχολῇ Τυράννου	1	“in the large room where Tyrannus had taught people”
1913	19:9	den4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τυράννου	1	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1914	19:10	cw5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here “all” is a generalization that means very many people throughout Asia heard the gospel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1915	19:10	kj12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here “word” stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1916	19:11	cb6w				0	Here the words “them” and “they” refer to those who were sick.
1917	19:11	fa6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	δυνάμεις τε οὐ τὰς τυχούσας, ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίει διὰ τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου	1	Here “hands” stands for Paul’s whole person. Alternate translation: “God was causing Paul to do miracles” or “God was doing miracles through Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1918	19:11	abcy			οὐ τὰς τυχούσας	1	“unusual”
1919	19:12	m3kl			καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια, καὶ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “when they took to sick people even handkerchiefs and aprons that had touched Paul”
1920	19:12	vc1v			καὶ & ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια	1	Possible meanings are (1) these were cloth items that Paul had touched or (2) these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used.
1921	19:12	aks4			σουδάρια	1	cloths worn around the head
1922	19:12	xs31			σιμικίνθια	1	clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of people
1923	19:12	kw9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας	1	This refers to sick people. Alternate translation: “sick people” or “those who were sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1924	19:12	nl3a			ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους	1	“those who were sick became healthy”
1925	19:13	he2x				0	This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. It is about Jewish exorcists.
1926	19:13	fgq4			ἐξορκιστῶν	1	people who send evil spirits away from people or places
1927	19:13	s12u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here “name” refers to Jesus’ power and authority. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1928	19:13	d59p			τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὃν Παῦλος κηρύσσει	1	“Jesus” was a common name at the time, so these exorcists wanted people to know of whom they spoke.
1929	19:13	vqt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	This stands for the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus” or “by the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1930	19:14	cb8p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σκευᾶ	1	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1931	19:15	i4a2			τὸν Ἰησοῦν γινώσκω, καὶ τὸν Παῦλον ἐπίσταμαι	1	“I know Jesus and Paul” or “I know Jesus, and I know Paul”
1932	19:15	nsl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ	1	The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. Alternate translation: “but I do not know you!” or “but you have no authority over me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1933	19:16	ty4x			φαλόμενος ὁ ἄνθρωπος & ἐν ᾧ ἦν τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν	1	This means that the evil spirit caused the man whom it was controlling to leap on the exorcists.
1934	19:16	lu7u			αὐτοὺς	1	This refers to people who send evil spirits from people or places. See how you translated this in Acts 19:13.
1935	19:16	b8cb			γυμνοὺς & ἐκφυγεῖν	1	The exorcists fled with their clothes ripped off them.
1936	19:17	j85h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they honored the name of the Lord Jesus” or “they considered the name of the Lord Jesus to be great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1937	19:17	j2hh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα	1	This stands for the power and authority of Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1938	19:18	tj8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	This ends the story about the Jewish exorcists. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
1939	19:19	z9rj			συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους	1	“collected their books.” The word “books” refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written.
1940	19:19	m6nf			ἐνώπιον πάντων	1	“in front of everyone”
1941	19:19	upz3			τὰς τιμὰς αὐτῶν	1	“the value of the books” or “the value of the scrolls”
1942	19:19	u9pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	μυριάδας πέντε	1	“50,000” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
1943	19:19	bcv2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	ἀργυρίου	1	A “piece of silver” was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
1944	19:20	es71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν	1	“So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1945	19:21	k1j1				0	Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet.
1946	19:21	de4f			δὲ	1	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.
1947	19:21	q18b			ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα & ὁ Παῦλος	1	“Paul completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus”
1948	19:21	fgq5			ἔθετο & ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι	1	Possible meanings are (1) Paul decided with the help of the Holy Spirit or (2) Paul decided within his own spirit, which means he made up his mind.
1949	19:21	brb7			Ἀχαΐαν	1	Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. It was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. See how you translated this in Acts 18:12.
1950	19:21	rdz4			δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν	1	“I must also travel to Rome”
1951	19:22	cy6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἔραστον	1	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1952	19:22	k35j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν χρόνον εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν	1	It is made explicit in the next few verses that Paul remains in Ephesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1953	19:22	uy9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς	1	This is repeated for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1954	19:23	y5ae		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Demetrius is introduced to the story. Verse 24 introduces background information about Demetrius. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess Artemis, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/writing-background]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1955	19:23	l7gz				0	Luke tells about a riot that broke out while Paul was in Ephesus.
1956	19:23	kn49			ἐγένετο & τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος περὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ	1	This is a summary opening statement.
1957	19:23	nb3p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	ἐγένετο & τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος	1	“the people became very upset” See how you translated this in Acts 12:18 (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1958	19:23	rwf2			τῆς ὁδοῦ	1	This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated this title in Acts 9:1.
1959	19:24	cg16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Δημήτριος & τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος	1	The use of the words “a certain” introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1960	19:24	nwt7			ἀργυροκόπος	1	a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry
1961	19:24	v8cb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δημήτριος & ὀνόματι	1	This is the name of a man. Demetrius was a silversmith in Ephesus who was against Paul and the local church. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1962	19:24	p58m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	παρείχετο & οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν	1	This is a way of saying that he brought in much business. Alternate translation: “made a lot of money for those who made the idols” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1963	19:25	kuz6			τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας	1	An occupation is a profession or job. Alternate translation: “others who did that kind of work”
1964	19:26	w5z6				0	Demetrius continues to speak to the craftsmen.
1965	19:26	rm6w			θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε ὅτι	1	“You have come to know and understand that”
1966	19:26	rx32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον	1	Paul’s stopping people from worshiping idols is spoken of as though Paul were literally turning the people in a different direction. Alternate translation: “caused many people to stop worshiping the local gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1967	19:26	z7e7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	λέγων ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοὶ, οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι	1	Here the word “hands” can refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “He is saying that the idols that people make are not real gods” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1968	19:27	r1w2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦτο κινδυνεύει ἡμῖν, τὸ μέρος εἰς ἀπελεγμὸν ἐλθεῖν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that the people will no longer want to buy idols from us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1969	19:27	j3bb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the people will think there is no benefit in going to the temple to worship the great goddess Artemis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1970	19:27	bqt4			μέλλειν τε καὶ καθαιρεῖσθαι τῆς μεγαλειότητος αὐτῆς	1	Artemis’s greatness only comes from what people think of her.
1971	19:27	hz7l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται	1	This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Here the words “Asia” and “the world” refer to the people in Asia and the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1972	19:28	t4lm				0	Here “they” refers to the craftsmen who made the idols (Acts 19:24-25).
1973	19:28	uc5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ	1	This speaks of the craftsmen as though they were containers. Here “anger” is spoken of as if it were the contents that fill a container. Alternate translation: “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1974	19:28	lcx8			ἔκραζον	1	“shouted aloud” or “shouted loudly”
1975	19:29	t7xs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως	1	Here “city” refers to the people. The city is spoken of as if it were a container. And, “confusion” is spoken of as if it were the contents that filled the container. Alternate translation: “Then people all over the city became upset and started shouting” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1976	19:29	nt7y			ὥρμησάν τε ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	This was a mob or near riot situation.
1977	19:29	ej3q			εἰς τὸ θέατρον	1	The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people.
1978	19:29	hjc8			συνεκδήμους Παύλου	1	The men who had been with Paul.
1979	19:29	d6r9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γάϊον καὶ Ἀρίσταρχον	1	These are names of men. Gaius and Aristarchus came from Macedonia but were working with Paul in Ephesus at this time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1980	19:30	ii1u				0	Ephesus was part of the Roman empire and in the province of Asia.
1981	19:31	z7ww			δοῦναι & εἰς τὸ θέατρον	1	The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. See how you translated “theater” in Acts 19:29.
1982	19:33	jr85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀλέξανδρον	1	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1983	19:33	j1mi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα	1	You can make explicit that Alexander was showing the crowd that he wanted them to be quiet. Alternate translation: “gestured to the crowd to be quiet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1984	19:33	tlq7			ἀπολογεῖσθαι	1	It is not clear whom or what Alexander wanted to defend. If your language requires this information, it might be best to use a general phrase like “to explain what was going on.”
1985	19:34	u1hp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φωνὴ & μία	1	The shouting together of the people at the same time is spoken of as though they were speaking with one voice. Alternate translation: “in unison” or “together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1986	19:35	fm3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	The words “You” and “you” refer to all the men present who were from Ephesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1987	19:35	pu96				0	The clerk of Ephesus speaks to quiet the crowd.
1988	19:35	sy9m			ὁ γραμματεὺς	1	This refers to the town “writer” or “secretary.”
1989	19:35	sd3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦ	1	The clerk asked this question to assure the crowd they were right and to comfort them. Alternate translation: “every man knows that the city of the Ephesians is temple keeper … heaven.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1990	19:35	k8dy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	ὃς οὐ γινώσκει	1	The town clerk uses “not” to emphasize that all of the people knew this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1991	19:35	hiw3			νεωκόρον	1	The Ephesian people maintained and guarded the temple of Artemis.
1992	19:35	afd1			τοῦ διοπετοῦς	1	Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite which fell from the sky. People thought that his rock had come directly from Zeus, the ruler of the Greek gods (idols).
1993	19:36	r8cf			ἀναντιρρήτων οὖν ὄντων τούτων	1	“Since you know these things”
1994	19:36	xj2n			μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν	1	“do not do anything before you have had time to think about it”
1995	19:36	s67q			προπετὲς	1	without careful thought
1996	19:37	s8a9			τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους	1	The words “these men” refer to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions (Acts 19:29).
1997	19:38	wgv5				0	The town clerk finishes speaking to the crowd.
1998	19:38	qd4s			οὖν	1	“Because what I have just said is true.” The town clerk had said in Acts 19:37 that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers.
1999	19:38	zkx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον	1	The word “accusation” can be stated as the verb “accuse.” Alternate translation: “want to accuse someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2000	19:38	szf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀνθύπατοί	1	the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2001	19:38	g8tp			ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις	1	This does not mean Demetrius and those with him will accuse each other. It means this is a place where people in general can speak their accusation. Alternate translation: “There people can accuse one another”
2002	19:39	hxh3			εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε	1	“But if you have other matters to discuss”
2003	19:39	wga5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “let us settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2004	19:39	et5j			τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	This refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided.
2005	19:40	sds7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι στάσεως περὶ τῆς σήμερον	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us of starting this riot today” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2006	20:intro	u91c				0	Acts 20 General Notes Structure and formatting In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem. Special concepts in this chapter Race Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]]) “Compelled by the Spirit” Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.
2007	20:1	cwq7				0	Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his travels.
2008	20:1	y5cq			μετὰ δὲ τὸ παύσασθαι	1	“After the riot” or “Following the riot”
2009	20:1	hr32			ἀσπασάμενος	1	“he said goodbye”
2010	20:2	edb8			παρακαλέσας αὐτοὺς λόγῳ πολλῷ	1	“had greatly encouraged the believers” or “had said many things to encourage the believers”
2011	20:3	yxj3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ποιήσας τε μῆνας τρεῖς	1	“After he had stayed there three months.” This speaks about time as if it were something a person could spend. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2012	20:3	cit9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γενομένης ἐπιβουλῆς αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Jews formed a plot against him” or “the Jews formed a secret plan to harm him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2013	20:3	ah5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	This means only some of the Jews. Alternate translation: “by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2014	20:3	m7na			μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν	1	“as he was ready to sail for Syria”
2015	20:4	y35x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “him” refers to Paul (Acts 20:1). All instances of “us” and “we” in the verses that follow refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2016	20:4	c9et			συνείπετο δὲ αὐτῷ	1	“Traveling with him”
2017	20:4	dw6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σώπατρος & Πύρρου & Σεκοῦνδος, & Τυχικὸς & Τρόφιμος	1	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2018	20:4	w4n1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βεροιαῖος & Δερβαῖος	1	These are names of places. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2019	20:4	w8j6			Ἀρίσταρχος & Γάϊος	1	These are names of men. See how you translated these names in Acts 19:29.
2020	20:5	itz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τρῳάδι	1	This is the name of a place. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2021	20:5	kv8t			οὗτοι & προσελθόντες	1	“these men had traveled ahead of us”
2022	20:6	l5dr			τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων	1	This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. See how you translated this in Acts 12:3.
2023	20:7	dnt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and Acts 20:4-6)
2024	20:7	mbr8				0	Luke tells about Paul’s preaching in Troas and about what happened to Eutychus.
2025	20:7	zff8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κλάσαι ἄρτον	1	Bread was part of their meals. Possible meanings are (1) this refers simply to eating a meal together. Alternate translation: “eat a meal” or (2) this refers to the meal they would eat together in order to remember Christ’s death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “to eat the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2026	20:7	j888			παρέτεινέν τε τὸν λόγον	1	“he continued to speak”
2027	20:8	ak8z			ὑπερῴῳ	1	This may have been the third floor house.
2028	20:9	hw7b				0	Here the word “himself” refers to Paul. The first word “he” refers to Paul; the second word “he” refers to the young man, Eutychus. The word “him” refers to Eutychus.
2029	20:9	v5q7			ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος	1	This was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough on which a person could sit.
2030	20:9	ju64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Εὔτυχος	1	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2031	20:9	tsp4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ	1	This speaks about sleep as if it were a deep hole into which a person could fall. Alternate translation: “who slept soundly” or “who became more and more tired until finally he was sleeping soundly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2032	20:9	abcz			κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου	1	The young man was fell asleep, not Paul.
2033	20:9	jp89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τριστέγου & καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός	1	When they went down to check his condition, they saw he was dead. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “third story; and when they went to pick him up, they found that he was dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2034	20:9	kh3h			τριστέγου	1	This means two floors above the ground floor. If your culture does not count the ground floor, you may state this as the “second story.”
2035	20:11	av7m				0	Here the word “he” refers to Paul.
2036	20:11	lih8				0	This is the end of the part of the story about Paul’s preaching at Troas and about Eutychus.
2037	20:11	w5w8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον	1	Bread was a common food during meals. Here “break bread” probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2038	20:11	t88c			οὕτως ἐξῆλθεν	1	“he went away”
2039	20:12	jkj5			τὸν παῖδα	1	This refers to Eutychus (Acts 20:9). Possible meanings are (1) he was a young man over 14 years old or (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old or (3) the word “boy” implies that he was a servant or a slave.
2040	20:12	abx0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ μετρίως	1	This is a way of saying that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2041	20:13	dja7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The words “he,” “himself,” and “him” refer to Paul. Here the word “we” refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2042	20:13	awt9				0	The writer Luke, Paul, and his other companions continue their travels; however, Paul goes separately for part of the trip.
2043	20:13	w4ew		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἡμεῖς & προελθόντες	1	The word “ourselves” adds emphasis and separates Luke and his traveling companions from Paul, who did not travel by boat. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2044	20:13	q4yz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἀνήχθημεν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἆσσον	1	Assos is a town located directly below present day Behram in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2045	20:13	nq2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	διατεταγμένος	1	Himself is used to emphasize that this is what Paul wanted. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2046	20:13	p8y7			πεζεύειν	1	“to travel on land”
2047	20:14	ju8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἤλθομεν εἰς Μιτυλήνην	1	Mitylene is a town located in present day Mitilini in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2048	20:15	ll2h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Paul, the writer, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2049	20:15	e6va			ἄντικρυς Χίου	1	“near the island” or “across from the island”
2050	20:15	ulk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Χίου	1	Chios is an island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2051	20:15	jyr7			παρεβάλομεν εἰς Σάμον	1	“we arrived at the island of Samos”
2052	20:15	b6c6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σάμον	1	Samos is an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea off the coast of modern day Turkey. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2053	20:15	s7g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μίλητον	1	Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2054	20:16	p272		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	κεκρίκει γὰρ ὁ Παῦλος παραπλεῦσαι τὴν Ἔφεσον	1	Paul sailed south past the port city of Ephesus, further south in order to land at Miletus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2055	20:16	p61e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι	1	This speaks about “time” as if it were a commodity that a person could spend or use up. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” or “so that he would not have a delay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2056	20:17	nw52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “he” refers to Paul. The word “our” refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2057	20:17	v9al				0	Paul calls the elders of the church of Ephesus and begins to speak to them.
2058	20:17	l9aj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Μιλήτου	1	Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. See how you translated this in Acts 20:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2059	20:18	b6li		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς	1	Here “yourselves” is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2060	20:18	vw6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν	1	Here “foot” stands for the entire person. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2061	20:18	t7zs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πῶς μεθ’ ὑμῶν τὸν πάντα χρόνον ἐγενόμην	1	This speaks about time as if it were something that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “how I always conducted myself when I was with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2062	20:19	m8x9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ταπεινοφροσύνης	1	This speaks about something humble as if it were low to the ground. The word “mind” stands for a person’s inner attitude. Alternate translation: “humility” or “humbleness” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2063	20:19	wh5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	δακρύων	1	Here “tears” stands for feeling sad and crying. Alternate translation: “I crying as I served the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2064	20:19	e6k7			πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι	1	“Sufferings” is an abstract noun. The meaning can be expressed as a verb. Alternate Translation: “while I suffered” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
2065	20:19	y5iw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	This does not mean every Jew. This lets us know who plotted. Alternate translation: “of some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2066	20:20	nu7h			ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην & τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν	1	“You know how I was never silent, but I always declared to you”
2067	20:20	kut9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	κατ’ οἴκους	1	Paul taught people in various private homes. The words “I taught” are understood. Alternate translation: “I also taught when I was in your homes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2068	20:21	w7mv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν	1	The abstract nouns “repentance” and “faith” can be stated as verbs. Alternate translation: “that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2069	20:22	ty3b				0	Here the word “I” refers to Paul.
2070	20:22	vam4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδεμένος & τῷ Πνεύματι	1	They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Spirit compels me to go there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2071	20:22	a9j1			τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς	1	“and I do not know what will happen to me there”
2072	20:23	q3ie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν	1	Here “chains” refers to Paul’s being arrested and put in prison. Alternate translation: “people will put me in prison and cause me to suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2073	20:24	w8d2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	This speaks about Paul’s “race” and “ministry” as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Here “race” and “ministry” mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2074	20:24	m5gc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον	1	Paul speaks about completing the work that Jesus has commanded him to do as if he were running a race. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2075	20:24	hg3l			διαμαρτύρασθαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	“to tell people the good news about God’s grace.” This is the ministry that Paul received from Jesus.
2076	20:25	f1sb				0	Paul continues to talk to the Ephesian elders (Acts 20:17).
2077	20:25	kj9c			καὶ νῦν ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ οἶδα	1	“Now, pay careful attention, because I know”
2078	20:25	z4ng			ἐγὼ οἶδα ὅτι & ὑμεῖς πάντες	1	“I know that all of you”
2079	20:25	aur9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν οἷς διῆλθον κηρύσσων τὴν βασιλείαν	1	Here “kingdom” stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “to whom I preached the message about God’s reign as king” or “to whom I preached about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2080	20:25	cq45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου	1	The word “face” here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “will not see me anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2081	20:26	e546		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων	1	Here “blood” stands for a person’s death, which, in this case, is not physical death but spiritual death when God declares a person guilty of sin. Paul had told them God’s truth. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for anyone whom God judges guilty of sin because they did not trust in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2082	20:26	v5el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πάντων	1	Here this means any person whether male or female. Alternate translation: “any person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2083	20:27	qa9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι & ὑμῖν	1	“For I did not keep silent and not tell you.” This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2084	20:28	u52d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Believers are likened to a “flock” of sheep here. Church leaders are entrusted by God with the care of the community of believers just as a shepherd would care for his flock of sheep and protect them from wolves. Alternate translation: “the group of believers the Holy spirit has entrusted to you. Be sure to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2085	20:28	cx69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	The shedding of the “blood” of Christ here is likened to a payment to God for our sins. Alternate translation: “the people Christ saved from their sins by shedding his blood on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2086	20:28	hjh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	Here “blood” stands for Christ’s death. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2087	20:29	ka6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰσελεύσονται & λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου	1	This is a picture of people who teach false doctrine and who harm the community of believers as though they were wolves that eat the sheep of the flock. Alternate translation: “many enemies will come among you and try to harm the community of believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2088	20:30	ftf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν	1	A false teacher convincing believers to start believing his false teaching is spoken of as if he were leading sheep away from the flock to follow him. Alternate translation: “in order to convince people who are disciples of Christ to become his disciples instead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2089	20:31	q2nl			γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες	1	“be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember”
2090	20:31	ll64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γρηγορεῖτε	1	“be awake and alert” or “watch out.” Christian leaders being alert about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2091	20:31	pvt6			μνημονεύοντες ὅτι	1	“Continue to remember that” or “Do not forget that”
2092	20:31	rt1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τριετίαν νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην & νουθετῶν	1	Paul did not teach them continuously for three years, but over the space of three years. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2093	20:31	hs1m			οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην & νουθετῶν	1	“I did not stop warning”
2094	20:31	rvh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μετὰ δακρύων	1	Here “tears” refers to Paul’s crying because of the strong emotion of concern he felt while he was warning the people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2095	20:32	ylm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παρατίθεμαι ὑμᾶς τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	Here “word” stands for a message. Alternate translation: “I ask God to take care of you and that he will help you to keep believing the message I spoke to you about his grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2096	20:32	vnb2			παρατίθεμαι	1	to give someone else the responsibility of taking care of someone or something
2097	20:32	s7rf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ & δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι	1	A person’s faith becoming stronger is spoken of as if the person were a wall and someone were building him higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make become stronger and stronger in your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2098	20:32	zvz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	δοῦναι τὴν κληρονομίαν	1	This speaks about the “word of his grace” as if it were God himself that would give the inheritance to believers. Alternate translation: “God will give you the inheritance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2099	20:32	x5jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν κληρονομίαν	1	The blessings that God gives believers is spoken of as if they were money or property that a child inherits from his father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2100	20:33	y6ii				0	Paul finishes speaking to the elders of the church of Ephesus; he began to speak them in Acts 20:18.
2101	20:33	yw8a			ἀργυρίου & οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα	1	“I did not desire someone’s silver” or “I did not want for myself anyone’s silver”
2102	20:33	ipq5			ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς	1	Clothing was considered a treasure; the more you had, the richer you were.
2103	20:34	f5a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ	1	The word “yourselves” is used here to add emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2104	20:34	ja5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ταῖς χρείαις μου & ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται	1	The word “hands” here represents the entire person. Alternate translation: “I worked to earn money and pay for my own expenses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2105	20:35	wn8j			κοπιῶντας δεῖ ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων	1	“you should work so as to have money to help people who cannot earn it for themselves”
2106	20:35	p3n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν ἀσθενούντων	1	You can state this nominal adjective as an adjective. Alternate translation: “weak persons” or “those who are weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2107	20:35	dpu1			ἀσθενούντων	1	“sick”
2108	20:35	ps2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here “words” refers to what Jesus has said. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2109	20:35	e396			μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν	1	This means a person receives the favor of God and experiences more joy when he gives to other people rather than always receiving from other people.
2110	20:36	q6bs				0	Paul ends his time with the elders of the church of Ephesus by praying with them.
2111	20:36	u3uc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ & προσηύξατο	1	It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. It was a sign of humility before God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2112	20:37	pb4r			ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου	1	“hugged him closely” or “put their arms around him”
2113	20:37	sze4			κατεφίλουν αὐτόν	1	Kissing someone on the cheek is an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East.
2114	20:38	bs3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν	1	The word “face” here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “will not see me anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2115	21:intro	gh1j				0	Acts 21 General Notes Structure and formatting Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews. The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does. Special concepts in this chapter “They are all determined to keep the law” The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that. Nazarite vow The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads (Acts 21:23). Gentiles in the temple The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.
2116	21:1	s3h3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2117	21:1	i6f8				0	The writer Luke, Paul, and his companions continue their travels.
2118	21:1	zz5h			εὐθυδρομήσαντες ἤλθομεν εἰς τὴν Κῶ	1	“we went straight to the city of Cos” or “we went directly to the city of Cos”
2119	21:1	e5y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κῶ	1	Cos is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2120	21:1	p6ss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ῥόδον	1	Rhodes is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region south of Cos and northeast of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2121	21:1	x7kg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πάταρα	1	Patara is a city on the southwest coast of modern day Turkey south of the Aegean Sea in the Mediterranean Sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2122	21:2	nz9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καὶ εὑρόντες πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην	1	Here “a ship crossing over” stands for the crew that would sail the ship. Alternate translation: “When we found a ship with a crew sailing over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2123	21:2	vbd3			πλοῖον διαπερῶν	1	Here “crossing” does not mean it was presently crossing but that it would be crossing to Phoenicia soon. Alternate translation: “a ship that would be going across the water” or “a ship that would be going”
2124	21:3	er3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2125	21:3	vkr2			καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον	1	“passed the island on the left” the left is the “port” side of a boat.
2126	21:3	hwx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκεῖσε & τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον	1	Here “ship” stands for the crew that was sailing the ship. Alternate translation: “the crew would unload the cargo from the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2127	21:4	y35m			οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	“These believers told Paul what the Holy Spirit had revealed to them.” They “urged him over and over.”
2128	21:5	fe1u				0	Here the word “They” refers to the believers from Tyre.
2129	21:5	a5wj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅτε & ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας	1	This speaks about days as if they were something that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “When the seven days were over” or “When it was time to leave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2130	21:5	q8xl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι	1	It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. This was a sign of humility before God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2131	21:6	ja1x			ἀπησπασάμεθα ἀλλήλους	1	“said goodbye to one another”
2132	21:7	hy6e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2133	21:7	kt6u				0	This begins Paul’s time in Caesarea.
2134	21:7	z4nt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	κατηντήσαμεν εἰς Πτολεμαΐδα	1	Ptolemaic was a city south of Tyre, Lebanon. Ptolemaic is modern day Acre, Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2135	21:7	ff1s			τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	“fellow believers”
2136	21:8	ay52			ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ	1	The “seven” refers to the men chosen to distribute food and aid to the widows in Acts 6:5.
2137	21:8	vi48			εὐαγγελιστοῦ	1	a person who tells people good news
2138	21:9	rcf4			τούτῳ	1	“Philip” from verse 8.
2139	21:9	cv8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about Philip and his daughters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2140	21:9	r1i1			θυγατέρες τέσσαρες παρθένοι, προφητεύουσαι	1	“four virgin daughters who regularly received and passed along messages from God”
2141	21:10	fe6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the words “we” and “us” refers to Luke, Paul, and those with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2142	21:10	hx8k				0	This tells about a prophecy made about Paul in Caesarea by the prophet Agabus.
2143	21:10	n3i8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τις & προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος	1	This introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2144	21:10	f9cb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος	1	Agabus was a man from Judea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2145	21:11	i8t2			ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου	1	“removed Paul’s belt from Paul’s waist”
2146	21:11	nq2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν.	1	This is a quotation within a quotation. The inner quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “‘The Holy Spirit says that this will be how the Jews in Jerusalem will tie up … of the Gentiles.’ (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2147	21:11	i8u7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	This does not mean all the Jews, but that these were the people who would do that. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” or “some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2148	21:11	zvw8			παραδώσουσιν	1	“deliver him”
2149	21:11	s92d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν	1	The word “hands” here represents control. Alternate translation: “into the legal custody of the Gentiles” or “to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2150	21:11	b59g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐθνῶν	1	This stands for the authorities among the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2151	21:12	fvh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Luke and the other believers but does not include the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2152	21:13	uwt2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν	1	Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2153	21:13	bj76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν	1	To make someone sad or to discourage someone is spoken of as if it were a heart being broken. Here “heart” stands for a person’s emotions. Alternate translation: “discouraging me” or “making me very sad” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2154	21:13	p5e5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “not only for them to tie me up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2155	21:13	q35x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here “name” refers to the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the Lord Jesus” or “because I believe in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2156	21:14	hwc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ πειθομένου & αὐτοῦ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul would not allow us to persuade him” or “We were unable to persuade Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2157	21:14	zl98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πειθομένου	1	You may need to make explicit what they could not persuade Paul not to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded not to go up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2158	21:14	as1i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γινέσθω	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “May everything happen as the Lord has planned it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2159	21:15	p5fm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, and not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2160	21:15	p5fl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “They” refers to some of the disciples from Caesarea.
2161	21:15	kd5l				0	This ends Paul’s time in Caesarea.
2162	21:16	k9kr			ἄγοντες παρ’ & τινι	1	“Among them was a man”
2163	21:16	zd9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μνάσωνί, τινι Κυπρίῳ	1	Mnason is a man from the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2164	21:16	c7r2			ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ	1	This means Mnason was one of the first to believe in Jesus.
2165	21:17	zpa7				0	Here the words “he” and “his” refers to Paul. The word “them” refers to the elders.
2166	21:17	wz34				0	Paul and his companions arrive in Jerusalem.
2167	21:17	d3gj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀπεδέξαντο ἡμᾶς οἱ ἀδελφοί	1	Here “brothers” refers to the believers in Jerusalem whether male or female. Alternate translation: “the fellow believers welcomed us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2168	21:19	bx9e			ἐξηγεῖτο καθ’ ἓν ἕκαστον	1	“he gave a detailed account of all”
2169	21:20	zks9				0	The elders in Jerusalem begin their response to Paul.
2170	21:20	a1hk			οἱ & ἀκούσαντες & ἐδόξαζον & εἶπόν τε αὐτῷ	1	Here the word “they” refers to James and the elders. The word “him” refers to Paul.
2171	21:20	xki4			ἀδελφέ	1	Here “brother” means “fellow believer.”
2172	21:20	c5pu			ὑπάρχουσιν	1	The word “they” refers to Jewish believers who wanted all believing Jews to keep the Jewish laws and customs.
2173	21:21	pyg8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατηχήθησαν δὲ περὶ σοῦ, ὅτι ἀποστασίαν διδάσκεις ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως τοὺς κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη πάντας Ἰουδαίους, λέγων μὴ περιτέμνειν αὐτοὺς τὰ τέκνα, μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν	1	Apparently here there are some Jews that are distorting what Paul is teaching. He does not discourage the Jews from obeying the law of Moses. His message is that circumcision and the other customs are not necessary for Jesus to save them. You can make explicit that the leaders of the Jewish believers in Jerusalem knew that Paul was teaching God’s true message. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2174	21:21	e5s4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηχήθησαν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “People have told the Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2175	21:21	sdl3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀποστασίαν & ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως	1	Here “Moses” stands for the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “to stop obeying the laws that Moses gave us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2176	21:21	knt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν	1	To obey the old customs is spoken of as if the customs were leading them and the people follow behind. Alternate translation: “not to obey the old customs” or “not to practice the old customs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2177	21:21	u56t			τοῖς ἔθεσιν	1	“the customs that Jews normally do”
2178	21:22	b28b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to James and the elders (Acts 21:18). The word “They” refers to the Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted to teach Jewish believers that they could still follow the laws of Moses (Acts 21:20-21). The words “them,” “their,” and the first “they” refer to the four men who made a vow. The second words “they” and “They” refer to the Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted to teach Jewish believers that they could still follow the laws of Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2179	21:23	b22r			ἄνδρες τέσσαρες, εὐχὴν ἔχοντες	1	“four men who made a promise to God.” This was the kind of vow where a person would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time.
2180	21:24	km4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τούτους παραλαβὼν, ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	They had to make themselves ritually pure so they could worship in the temple. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2181	21:24	c3ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς	1	“pay for what they will need.” The expenses would go toward buying a male and female lamb, a ram, and grain and drink offerings. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2182	21:24	abq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν	1	This was a sign that the person had completed what they promised God they would do. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2183	21:24	nu9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that people are saying about you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2184	21:24	sv6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον	1	This speaks of obeying the law as if the law were a leader and the people follow behind it. Alternate translation: “obey the law” or “live a life that conforms to the law of Moses and other Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2185	21:25	c4kl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to James and the elders. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2186	21:25	cqm9				0	James and the elders in Jerusalem finish their request to Paul (Acts 21:18).
2187	21:25	a35u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον, καὶ αἷμα, καὶ πνικτὸν	1	All of these are rules about what they can eat. They are forbidden to eat meat of animals sacrificed to an idol, meat with blood still in it, and meat from a strangled animal because it would still have blood in the meat. See how you translated similar phrases in Acts 15:20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2188	21:25	bpb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they stay away from the meat of an animal that someone sacrificed to an idol” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2189	21:25	wjd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πνικτὸν	1	This can be stated in active form. You can also state explicitly the assumed information about strangled animals. Alternate translation: “from animals that a person has strangled” or “from animals that a person killed for food but did not drain its blood” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2190	21:26	cr14			παραλαβὼν τοὺς ἄνδρας	1	These are the 4 men who made a vow.
2191	21:26	s8z9			σὺν αὐτοῖς ἁγνισθεὶς	1	Before entering the temple area the Jews were required to be ceremonially or ritually clean. This cleansing had to do with Jews having contact with Gentiles.
2192	21:26	xu9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	εἰσῄει εἰς τὸ ἱερόν	1	They did not go into the temple itself where only the high priest was allowed to enter. They entered the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “went into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2193	21:26	pvy3			τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ	1	This is a separate purification process from the purification process which they were required to fulfill in order to enter the temple area.
2194	21:26	gc23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη & ἡ προσφορά	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “until they presented the animals for an offering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2195	21:27	l3bg				0	Verse 29 gives background information about the Jews from Asia.
2196	21:27	p4gi				0	This begins the story of Paul’s arrest.
2197	21:27	j9zm			αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι	1	These are the seven days for purification.
2198	21:27	k4l1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Paul was not in the temple itself. He was in the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2199	21:27	u942		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον	1	Inciting people to become very angry at Paul is spoken of as if they stirred up the crowd’s emotions. Alternate translation: “caused a large number of people to be very angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2200	21:27	mks6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	Here “laid hands on” means to “seize” or to “grab.” See how you translated “laid hands on” in Acts 5:18. Alternate translation: “grabbed Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2201	21:28	sfg3			τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου	1	“the people of Israel, the law of Moses, and the temple”
2202	21:28	jc9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔτι τε καὶ Ἕλληνας εἰσήγαγεν εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	Only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2203	21:29	t2z7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἦσαν γὰρ προεωρακότες Τρόφιμον τὸν Ἐφέσιον ἐν τῇ πόλει σὺν αὐτῷ, ὃν ἐνόμιζον ὅτι εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν εἰσήγαγεν ὁ Παῦλος	1	This is background information. Luke is explaining why the Jews from Asia thought Paul brought a Greek into the temple. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2204	21:29	h1uu			Τρόφιμον	1	This was a Greek man that they accused Paul of having brought into the inner temple area that was only for Jews. See how you translated his name in Acts 20:4.
2205	21:30	upl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	The word “All” here is an exaggeration for emphasis. The word “city” represents the people in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Many people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2206	21:30	x2sx			ἐπιλαβόμενοι τοῦ Παύλου	1	“seized Paul” or “grabbed Paul”
2207	21:30	xd6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι	1	They shut the doors so that there would not be rioting in the temple area. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews immediately shut the temple doors” or “The temple guards immediately shut the doors” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2208	21:31	d6vt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης	1	Here “news” refers to the messenger who went to speak the news. Alternate translation: “someone gave news to the chief captain of the guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2209	21:31	hu5r			ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ	1	The phrase “came up to” is used because the chief captain was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard.
2210	21:31	p85a			τῷ χιλιάρχῳ	1	a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers
2211	21:31	u65r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	The word “Jerusalem” here represents the people of Jerusalem. The word “all” is an exaggeration to show a large crowd was upset. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were in an uproar” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2212	21:32	j81t				0	The first word “he” and the word “He” refer to the chief captain of the guard mentioned in Acts 21:31.
2213	21:32	dgz5			κατέδραμεν	1	From the fortress, there are stairs going down into the court.
2214	21:32	e4rj			τὸν χιλίαρχον	1	a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers
2215	21:33	w28u			ἐπελάβετο αὐτοῦ	1	“took hold of Paul” or “arrested Paul”
2216	21:33	zi4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “commanded his soldiers to bind him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2217	21:33	xd9w			ἁλύσεσι δυσί	1	This means they bound Paul to two Roman soldiers, one on each side of him.
2218	21:33	y6zw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη καὶ τί ἐστιν πεποιηκώς	1	This can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “He asked, ‘Who is this man? What has he done?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2219	21:33	fi22			ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη	1	The chief captain is speaking to the crowd, not to Paul.
2220	21:34	pci2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἄλλοι	1	The words “were shouting” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and others were shouting another” or “and others in the crowd were shouting something else” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2221	21:34	k35e			αὐτοῦ	1	This was a military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.
2222	21:34	qcc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν ἄγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2223	21:34	w2qj			εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court.
2224	21:35	h9n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅτε δὲ ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς, συνέβη βαστάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “When Paul came to the steps of the fortress, the soldiers carried him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2225	21:36	kax6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	αἶρε αὐτόν	1	The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul’s death. Alternate translation: “Put him to death” or “Kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
2226	21:37	j9xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μέλλων τε εἰσάγεσθαι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “As the soldiers were ready to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2227	21:37	qp63			τὴν παρεμβολὴν	1	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2228	21:37	inl1			τῷ χιλιάρχῳ	1	a Roman military officer of about 600 soldiers
2229	21:37	p5cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις	11	The chief captain uses this questions to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. Alternate translation: “So you speak Greek.” or “I didn’t know you spoke Greek.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2230	21:38	xx2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων	1	The chief captain uses this question and the question “Do you speak Greek?” (verse 37) to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. Possible meanings are (1) as in ULT, the chief captain believes that even though Paul speaks Greek, Paul is the Egyptian. “Even though you speak Greek, I still think you are the Egyptian … wilderness.” (2) Because Paul speaks Greek, the chief captain thinks that perhaps Paul is not the Egyptian. “So you speak Greek. Perhaps I was wrong to think you were that Egyptian … wilderness.” It is best to retain the questions if the reader can infer one of the two meanings from them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2231	21:38	nxs6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος	1	Shortly before Paul’s visit, an unnamed man from Egypt had launched a revolt against Rome in Jerusalem. Later he escaped into the wilderness and the commander wonders if Paul might be the same man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2232	21:38	lwi4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀναστατώσας	1	This word “rebellion” can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “caused people to rebel against the Roman government” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2233	21:38	tqh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας	1	“the 4,000 terrorists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2234	21:38	p2ym			σικαρίων	1	This refers to a group of Jewish rebels who killed Romans and anyone who supported Romans.
2235	21:39	t6ax				0	Paul begins to defend what he did.
2236	21:39	ys84			δέομαι & σου	1	“I beg you” or “I plead with you”
2237	21:39	a139			ἐπίτρεψόν μοι	1	“please allow me” or please permit me”
2238	21:40	qp2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιτρέψαντος & αὐτοῦ	1	The word “permission” can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “the captain permitted Paul to speak” or “the captain allowed Paul to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2239	21:40	a4y2			ὁ Παῦλος ἑστὼς ἐπὶ τῶν ἀναβαθμῶν	1	The word “steps” here refers to the steps on the stairway to the fortress.
2240	21:40	rk1y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	It can be stated explicitly why Paul motioned with the hand. Alternate translation: “motioned with his hand for the people to be quiet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2241	21:40	xj6i			πολλῆς δὲ σιγῆς γενομένης	1	“When the people were completely silent”
2242	22:intro	gq5g				0	Acts 22 General Notes Structure and formatting This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 26) Special concepts in this chapter “In the Hebrew language” Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew. “The Way” No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.
2243	22:1	kq95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	Verse 2 gives background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2244	22:1	a8ir				0	Paul speaks to the Jewish crowd in Jerusalem.
2245	22:1	xe46			ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	This is a polite way of addressing men who are Paul’s age as well as the older men in the audience.
2246	22:1	pe8t			μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ	1	“I will now explain to you” or “I will now present to you”
2247	22:2	b4sk			τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ	1	The Hebrew language was the language of the Jews.
2248	22:3	g311		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “but I was a student of rabbi Gamaliel here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2249	22:3	d4dx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ	1	Here “feet” stands for the place where a student would sit while learning from a teacher. Alternate translation: “by Gamaliel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2250	22:3	b1dq			Γαμαλιήλ	1	Gamaliel was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law. See how you translated this name in Acts 5:34.
2251	22:3	iz4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπαιδευμένος κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “He instructed me how to carefully obey every law of our forefathers” or “The instruction I received followed the exact details of the law of our forefathers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2252	22:3	lqk7			πατρῴου νόμου	1	“law of our ancestors.” This refers to the law that God gave to the people of Israel through Moses.
2253	22:3	a8d6			ζηλωτὴς ὑπάρχων τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	“I am completely dedicated to obeying God” or “I am passionate about my service to God”
2254	22:3	dbl4			καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον	1	“in the same way all of you are today.” Paul compares himself with the crowd.
2255	22:4	jy3z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα	1	Here “this Way” represents the people who belonged to the group called “the Way.” Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to this Way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2256	22:4	bk4c			ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated “the Way” in Acts 9:2.
2257	22:4	dr8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄχρι θανάτου	1	The word “death” can be translated with the verb “kill” or “die.” Alternate translation: “and I looked for ways to kill them” or “and I even caused them to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2258	22:4	zd2r			δεσμεύων καὶ παραδιδοὺς εἰς φυλακὰς, ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας	1	“tying up both men and women and taking them to prison”
2259	22:5	v2km			μαρτυρεῖ	1	“can testify” or “can tell you”
2260	22:5	i45u			παρ’ ὧν & ἐπιστολὰς δεξάμενος	1	“The high priests and elders gave me letters”
2261	22:5	in72			πρὸς τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, εἰς Δαμασκὸν	1	Here “brothers” refers to “fellow Jews.”
2262	22:5	y82b			ἄξων & τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, δεδεμένους εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	“They ordered me to bind with chains those of the Way and bring them back to Jerusalem”
2263	22:5	ht9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα τιμωρηθῶσιν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “in order that they may receive punishment” or “in order that the Jewish authorities could punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2264	22:6	pe9s				0	Paul describes his encounter with Jesus.
2265	22:6	w4l7			ἐγένετο δέ	1	This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2266	22:7	d6nd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἤκουσα φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι	1	Here “voice” stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone say to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2267	22:9	h95h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὴν & φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν τοῦ λαλοῦντός μοι	1	Here “voice” stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “they did not understand what the one who spoke to me was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2268	22:10	a91a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “there someone will tell you” or “there you will find out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2269	22:11	n1kb			οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου	1	“I was left blind because of that light’s brightness”
2270	22:11	n2n1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι, ἦλθον εἰς Δαμασκόν	1	Here “hands” stands for those leading Paul. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “those with me guided me into Damascus” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2271	22:12	a17q				0	The words “He” and “him” refer to Ananias.
2272	22:12	h5bh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Though this is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts Acts 5:3, you may translate it the same way though as you did in Acts 5:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2273	22:12	z1g3			ἀνὴρ εὐλαβὴς κατὰ τὸν νόμον	1	Ananias was very serious about following God’s law.
2274	22:12	e7uw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μαρτυρούμενος ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν κατοικούντων Ἰουδαίων	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Jews who lived there spoke well of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2275	22:13	un4g			Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ	1	Here “Brother” is a polite way to address someone. Alternate translation: “My friend Saul”
2276	22:13	x3kc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάβλεψον	1	The word”sight” can be translated with the verb “see.” Alternate translation: “see again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2277	22:13	se47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	This was a customary way of saying something happened immediately. Alternate translation: “At that instant” or “Instantly” or “Immediately” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2278	22:14	v2i7				0	The word “he” refers to Ananias (Acts 22:12).
2279	22:14	k3ck				0	Paul finishes telling what had happened to him in Damascus. He quotes what Ananias said to him. This is still part of his speech to the crowd in Jerusalem.
2280	22:14	k417			τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ	1	“what God is planning and will cause to happen”
2281	22:14	dg8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ	1	Both “voice” and “mouth” refer to the one speaking. Alternate translation: “to hear him speak directly to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2282	22:15	i5q8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους	1	Here “men” means all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2283	22:16	bhg9			νῦν	1	Here “now” does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
2284	22:16	mmx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί μέλλεις	1	This question was asked to exhort Paul to be baptized. Alternate translation: “Do not wait!” or “Do not delay!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2285	22:16	lt2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βάπτισαι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “let me baptize you” or “receive baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2286	22:16	zr5p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου	1	As washing one’s body removes dirt, calling on the name of Jesus for forgiveness cleanses one’s inner being from sin. Alternate translation: “ask forgiveness for your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2287	22:16	g5dq			ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	Here “name” refers to the Lord. Alternate translation: “calling on the Lord” or “trusting in the Lord”
2288	22:17	znq6				0	Paul begins to tell the crowd about his vision of Jesus.
2289	22:17	its2			ἐγένετο δέ	1	This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2290	22:17	yr9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γενέσθαι με ἐν ἐκστάσει	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I had a vision” or “God gave me a vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2291	22:18	jy2c			ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν λέγοντά μοι	1	“I saw Jesus as he said to me”
2292	22:18	qul6			οὐ παραδέξονταί σου μαρτυρίαν περὶ ἐμοῦ	1	“those who live in Jerusalem will not believe what you tell them about me”
2293	22:19	q5cl				0	Here the word “they” refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem.
2294	22:19	p7gz				0	This ends what Paul was able to say to the crowd of Jewish people by the fortress.
2295	22:19	im4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται	1	The word “themselves” is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2296	22:19	da1e			κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς	1	Paul went to synagogues to find Jews who believed in Jesus.
2297	22:20	y7t1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου	1	Here “blood” stands for Stephen’s life. To spill blood means to kill. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they killed Stephen who testified about you” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2298	22:22	fj9x				0	Here the words “him” and the first two words “he” refer to Paul. The word “He” and the last “he” refer to the chief captain.
2299	22:22	ta8z			αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον	1	The phrase “from the earth” adds emphasis to “Away with such a fellow.” Alternate translation: “Kill him”
2300	22:23	ylr7			κραυγαζόντων	1	“While they were.” The phrase “As they were” is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time.
2301	22:23	b6a7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια, καὶ κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα	1	These actions show that the Jews there are outraged because they feel Paul has spoken against God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2302	22:24	x7zv			χιλίαρχος	1	a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers
2303	22:24	h6gp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν & εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2304	22:24	sth6			τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2305	22:24	pz47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	The commander wants Paul tortured by whipping him to ensure he tells the truth. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “He ordered his soldiers to whip Paul to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2306	22:25	ar63				0	Here the word “they” refers to the soldiers.
2307	22:25	st4k			τοῖς ἱμᾶσιν	1	These were strips of leather or animal hide.
2308	22:25	yjw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν	1	Paul uses this question to make the centurion check the validity of having his soldiers whip Paul. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and who was not given his legal right to a trial!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2309	22:26	pca7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν	1	This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. Alternate translation: “You should not do this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2310	22:27	pe31				0	Here the word “him” refers to Paul.
2311	22:27	e69y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	προσελθὼν & ὁ χιλίαρχος	1	Here “came” can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2312	22:28	dr2w			ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην	1	“It was only after I paid a lot of money to the Roman authorities.” The captain makes this statement because he knows how hard it is to become a Roman citizen, and he suspects Paul is not telling truth.
2313	22:28	r79c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐγὼ & τὴν πολιτείαν & ἐκτησάμην	1	“I got citizenship.” The word “citizenship” is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2314	22:28	rly1			ἐγὼ δὲ & γεγέννημαι	1	If the father is a Roman citizen, then his children become Roman citizens automatically when they are born.
2315	22:29	ii8p			οἱ μέλλοντες & ἀνετάζειν	1	“the men who planned to question” or “the men who were preparing to question”
2316	22:30	g33i				0	Here the word “he” refers to the chief captain.
2317	22:30	kx58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔλυσεν αὐτόν	1	Possibly the “chief officer” stands for the chief officers’ soldiers. Alternate translation: “So the chief captain ordered his soldiers to untie Paul’s bonds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2318	22:30	c5ia			καταγαγὼν τὸν Παῦλον	1	From the fortress, there is a stairway going down to the temple courts.
2319	23:intro	gbw5				0	Acts 23 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5. Special concepts in this chapter Resurrection of the dead The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/reward]]) “Called a curse” Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do. Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen. Important figures of speech in this chapter Whitewash This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2320	23:1	z2sq				0	Paul stands before the chief priests and the council members (Acts 22:30).
2321	23:1	jru4			ἀδελφοί	1	Here this means “Fellow Jews.”
2322	23:1	nn2q			ἐγὼ πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ πεπολίτευμαι τῷ Θεῷ ἄχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας	1	“I know that even to this day I have done what God has wanted me to do”
2323	23:2	yz4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	This is the name of a man. Though this is the same name, this not the same Ananias as in Acts 5:1 nor the same Ananias as in Acts 9:10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2324	23:3	igq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε	1	This refers to a wall that was painted white to make it look clean. Paul told Ananias that just as a wall can be painted to look clean so Ananias appeared to look morally clean, but he was really full of evil intent. Alternate translation: “whitepainted wall” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2325	23:3	un7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι	1	Paul uses a question to point out Ananias’ hypocrisy. Alternate translation: “You sit there to judge … against the law.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2326	23:3	m6nb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι	1	This can be stated in active form. You can use the same word for “strike” as you did in the phrase “God will strike you.” Alternate translation: “command people to strike me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2327	23:4	lkh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς	1	The men use this question to scold Paul for what he has said in Acts 23:3. Alternate translation: “Do not insult God’s high priest!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2328	23:5	e8lg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γέγραπται γὰρ	1	Paul is about to quote what Moses wrote in the law. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2329	23:6	pbe1			ἀδελφοί	1	Here “Brothers” means “Fellow Jews”
2330	23:6	as3f			υἱὸς Φαρισαίων	1	Here “son” means he is the literal son of a Pharisee and also the descendant of Pharisees. Alternate translation: “and my father and forefathers were Pharisees”
2331	23:6	iz18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	The word “resurrection” can be stated as “come back to life.” The word “dead” can be stated as “those who have died.” Alternate translation: “those who have died will come back to life, I” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2332	23:6	ys5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ κρίνομαι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2333	23:7	abs3			ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος	1	“the people in the crowd strongly disagreed with one another”
2334	23:8	gl1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Σαδδουκαῖοι & γὰρ & Φαρισαῖοι δὲ	1	This is background information about the Sadducees and Pharisees. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2335	23:9	eaf1			ἐγένετο δὲ κραυγὴ μεγάλη	1	“So they began shouting loudly at one another.” The word “so” marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is Paul’s stating his belief in the resurrection.
2336	23:9	ayr8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	εἰ & πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος	1	The Pharisees are rebuking the Sadducees by affirming that spirits and angels do exist and can speak to people. Alternate translation: “Maybe a spirit or an angel has spoken with him!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
2337	23:10	dr1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πολλῆς δὲ γινομένης στάσεως	1	The words “a great argument” can be re-stated as “argue violently.” Alternate translation: “When they began to argue violently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2338	23:10	s65i			χιλίαρχος	1	a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers
2339	23:10	f568		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1	This can be stated in active form. The phrase “be torn to pieces” might be an exaggeration of how the people might harm Paul. Alternate translation: “they might tear Paul to pieces” or “they would cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2340	23:10	man3			ἁρπάσαι αὐτὸν	1	“use physical force to take him away”
2341	23:10	ap3c			εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2342	23:11	i9w5			τῇ & ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ	1	This means the night after the day Paul went before the council. Alternate translation: “That night”
2343	23:11	r4q4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι	1	The words “about me” are understood. Alternate translation: “bear witness about me in Rome” or “testify about me in Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2344	23:12	fm3y				0	While Paul was in the prison at the fortress, the disbelieving religious Jews vow to kill him.
2345	23:12	klb4			ποιήσαντες συστροφὴν	1	“organized a group with a shared purpose” here, to kill Paul.
2346	23:12	g3sj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς	1	The noun “curse” can be translated as a verb. It can also be made explicit what would cause them to be cursed. Alternate translation: “asked God to curse them if they did not do what they promised” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2347	23:13	f1u2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	τεσσεράκοντα οἱ	1	“40 men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2348	23:13	u5s5			ταύτην τὴν συνωμοσίαν ποιησάμενοι	1	“who made this plan” or “who planned to kill Paul”
2349	23:14	zb6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here the word “They” refers to the forty Jews in Acts 23:13. Here “you” is plural and refers to the chief priests and elders. Both “us” and “we” refer to the forty Jews who planned to kill Paul. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2350	23:14	ur73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς, μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωμεν τὸν Παῦλον	1	To make a vow and to ask God to curse them if they do not fulfill their vow is spoken of as if the curse were an object that they carry on their shoulders. Alternate translation: “We have sworn to eat nothing until we have killed Paul. We asked God to curse us if we do not do what we promised to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2351	23:15	w418			νῦν οὖν	1	“Because what we have just said is true” or “Because we have put ourselves under this curse”
2352	23:15	q9e6			νῦν	1	This does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
2353	23:15	q9mb			καταγάγῃ αὐτὸν εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	“bring Paul from the fortress to meet with you”
2354	23:15	m133			ὡς μέλλοντας διαγινώσκειν ἀκριβέστερον τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	“as though you want to learn more about what Paul has done”
2355	23:16	d7cy				0	Here the word “he” refers to Paul’s nephew. The word “him” refers to the chief captain.
2356	23:16	w6fe			υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου	1	“the son of Paul’s sister” or “Paul’s nephew”
2357	23:16	pj5h			τὴν ἐνέδραν	1	“they were ready to ambush Paul” or “they were waiting to kill Paul”
2358	23:16	a5hx			τὴν παρεμβολὴν	1	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2359	23:18	abd0			ὁ μὲν οὖν παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν	1	“So taking the young man, the centurion brought him”
2360	23:18	lzf3			ὁ δέσμιος, Παῦλος, προσκαλεσάμενός με	1	“Paul the prisoner asked me to come talk with him”
2361	23:18	ju2b			τοῦτον τὸν νεανίαν	1	Since the chief captain calls him a young man, this suggests Paul’s nephew may have been 12 to 15 years old.
2362	23:19	yp12			ἐπιλαβόμενος & τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ ὁ χιλίαρχος	1	Since the chief captain took the young man by the hand and calls him a young man (verse 18), this suggests Paul’s nephew may have been 12 to 15 years old.
2363	23:20	uv6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι συνέθεντο	1	This does not mean all Jews, but all of the group that was there. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews have agreed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2364	23:20	wp5d			Παῦλον καταγάγῃς	1	“to bring Paul down from the fortress”
2365	23:20	fev5			μέλλων τι ἀκριβέστερον πυνθάνεσθαι περὶ αὐτοῦ.	1	“they want to learn more about what Paul has done”
2366	23:21	vdr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	ἄνδρες & τεσσεράκοντα	1	“40 men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2367	23:21	i2k9			ἐνεδρεύουσιν & αὐτὸν	1	“ready to ambush Paul” or “ready to kill Paul”
2368	23:21	r695			οἵτινες ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς μήτε φαγεῖν μήτε πιεῖν, ἕως οὗ ἀνέλωσιν αὐτόν	1	“They have sworn to eat or drink nothing until they have killed Paul. And they asked God to curse them if they do not do what they promised to do”
2369	23:22	av3g				0	Here the word “he” refers the chief captain.
2370	23:22	av3h				0	Felix, who resided at Caesarea, was the roman governor of the area.
2371	23:23	wk7k			προσκαλεσάμενός	1	“he called to himself”
2372	23:23	q741		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	δύο τῶν ἑκατονταρχῶν	1	“2 of the centurions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2373	23:23	b7z3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	ἱππεῖς ἑβδομήκοντα	1	“70 horsemen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2374	23:23	mgi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	δεξιολάβους διακοσίους	1	“200 soldiers that are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2375	23:23	kg8s			τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός	1	This was about 9:00 p.m. at night.
2376	23:25	vg8x				0	The chief captain writes a letter to Governor Felix about the arrest of Paul.
2377	23:25	vg8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names		0	Claudius Lysias is the name of the chief captain. Governor Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2378	23:26	zf93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν	1	This is a formal introduction to the letter. The chief captain begins by referring to himself. You can translate it in the first person. The words “am writing” are understood. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-123person]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2379	23:26	u2ih			τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι	1	“to Governor Felix who deserves greatest honors”
2380	23:27	zr7l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Here “Jews” means “some of the Jews.” This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews arrested this man” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2381	23:27	ha13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they were ready to kill Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2382	23:27	v78t			ἐπιστὰς σὺν τῷ στρατεύματι	1	“I with my soldiers arrived at the place where Paul and these Jews were”
2383	23:28	lb1a				0	Here the word “I” refers to Claudius Lysias, the chief captain.
2384	23:28	lb1b				0	The word “they” refers to the group of Jews who accused Paul.
2385	23:28	lb1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	The word “you” is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2386	23:28	pmq7				0	The chief captain ends his letter to Governor Felix.
2387	23:29	zt4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that they were accusing him of questions about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2388	23:29	wsh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα	1	The abstract nouns “accusation,” “death,” and “imprisonment” can be stated as verbs. Alternate translation: “but nobody accused him of anything that should cause Roman authorities to kill him or to send him to prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2389	23:30	i2ji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μηνυθείσης δέ μοι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Later I learned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2390	23:31	ifs1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names		0	Here the first word “him” refers to Paul; the second use of the word “him” refers to Governor Felix. Antipatris was a city built by Herod in honor of his father, Antipater. It stood at a site located today in central Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2391	23:31	s9rf				0	This ends Paul’s time under arrest in Jerusalem and begins his time of arrest in Caesarea with Governor Felix.
2392	23:31	ny4k			οἱ & οὖν στρατιῶται κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς	1	The word “so” marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is the chief captain’s commanding the soldiers to escort Paul.
2393	23:31	ptv4			ἀναλαβόντες τὸν Παῦλον, ἤγαγον διὰ νυκτὸς	1	Here “brought” can be translated as “took.” Alternate translation: “They got Paul and took him at night”
2394	23:32	abd1			ἐάσαντες & ὑπέστρεψαν	1	Here both instances of they refer to the foot soldiers who left the horsemen and returned to their fortress.
2395	23:33	abx1			εἰσελθόντες	1	Here they refers to the horsemen who took Paul all the way to Caesarea.
2396	23:34	u44w				0	Here the first and second words “he” refer to Governor Felix, the third word “he” and the word “him” refer to Paul, and the last word “he” refers to Governor Felix. The words “you” and your” refer to Paul.
2397	23:34	abd2			ἀναγνοὺς & ἐπερωτήσας & πυθόμενος	1	All of these actions are things the governor did.
2398	23:34	dtx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν	1	This can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “he asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’ When” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2399	23:35	dwv2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔφη	1	This sentence, which begins with the words “When he learned” in verse 43, can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Paul said, ‘I am from Cilicia.’ Then the governor said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2400	23:35	uji1			διακούσομαί σου	1	“I will listen to all you have to say”
2401	23:35	mga2			κελεύσας & φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he commanded soldiers to keep him” or “commanded soldiers to restrain him”
2402	24:intro	j74u				0	Acts 24 General Notes Structure and formatting Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do. Special concepts in this chapter Respect Both the Jewish leaders (Acts 24:2-4) and Paul (Acts 24:10) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Governmental leaders The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2403	24:1	qw1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here the word “you” refers to Felix, the governor. Here “we” refers to the citizens under Felix. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2404	24:1	bc8k				0	Paul is on trial in Caesarea. Tertullus presents Governor Felix with the charges against Paul.
2405	24:1	e8rp			μετὰ δὲ πέντε ἡμέρας	1	“five days after the Roman soldiers took Paul to Caesarea”
2406	24:1	n9gu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	This is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias as in Acts 5:1 nor the same Ananias as in Acts 9:10. See how you translated this in Acts 23:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2407	24:1	f3vx			ῥήτορος	1	“a lawyer.” Tertullus was an expert in Roman law who was there to accuse Paul in court.
2408	24:1	xm6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τερτύλλου	1	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2409	24:1	q7wj			κατέβη	1	“went to Caesarea where Paul was”
2410	24:1	nq9x			τῷ ἡγεμόνι	1	“in the presence of the governor who was judge in the court”
2411	24:1	zm5e			ἐνεφάνισαν & κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου	1	“began to argue the case before the governor that Paul had broken the law.”
2412	24:2	e6zg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	πολλῆς εἰρήνης τυγχάνοντες	1	Here “we” refers to the citizens under Felix. Alternate translation: “we, the people that you govern, have great peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2413	24:2	sv8c			καὶ διορθωμάτων γινομένων τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ διὰ τῆς σῆς προνοίας	1	“and your planning has greatly improved our nation”
2414	24:3	r5jl			μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας	1	The word “thankfulness” is an abstract noun. It can be stated as an adjective or verb. Alternate translation: “so we are very thankful and we welcome everything that you do” or “so we thank you very much and welcome everything that you do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2415	24:3	q3fj			κράτιστε Φῆλιξ	1	“Governor Felix who deserves greatest honor” Felix was the roman governor over the whole region. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 23:25.
2416	24:4	tyq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “we” refers to Ananias, certain elders, and Tertullus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2417	24:4	jww2			ἵνα δὲ μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον σε ἐνκόπτω	1	Possible meanings are (1) “so that I will not take up too much of your time” or (2) “so that I will not tire you”
2418	24:4	xfm5			ἀκοῦσαί & ἡμῶν συντόμως, τῇ σῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ	1	“kindly listen to my short speech”
2419	24:5	i1qs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον λοιμὸν	1	This speaks of Paul as if he were a plague that spreads from one person to another. Alternate translation: “this man to be a trouble maker” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2420	24:5	k1v1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	The word “all” here is probably an exaggeration used to strengthen their accusation against Paul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2421	24:5	zg4a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρωτοστάτην & τῆς τῶν Ναζωραίων αἱρέσεως	1	The phrase “Nazarene sect” is another name for the Christians. Alternate translation: “He also leads the entire group whom people call the followers of the Nazarene” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2422	24:5	n6zb			αἱρέσεως	1	This is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism.
2423	24:7	ujn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here the word “you” is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2424	24:7	xkr4				0	Tertullus finishes presenting the charges against Paul before Governor Felix.
2425	24:8	e26a			ἐπιγνῶναι ὧν ἡμεῖς κατηγοροῦμεν αὐτοῦ	1	“to learn whether or not these charges that we bring against him are true” or “to learn whether or not he is guilty of the things we accuse him of”
2426	24:9	rq5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	This refers to the Jewish leaders who were there at Paul’s trial. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2427	24:10	my1c				0	Here the word “they” refers to the Jews who were accusing Paul.
2428	24:10	ict8				0	Paul responds to Governor Felix about the charges brought against him.
2429	24:10	s92a			νεύσαντος & τοῦ ἡγεμόνος	1	“the governor gestured”
2430	24:10	uu7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ	1	Here “nation” refers to the people of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “a judge for the people of the Jewish nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2431	24:10	sr5t			ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογοῦμαι	1	“explain my situation”
2432	24:11	dr4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	ἡμέραι δώδεκα, ἀφ’ ἧς	1	“12 days since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2433	24:12	wbf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἢ ἐπίστασιν ποιοῦντα ὄχλου	1	“Stir up” here is a metaphor for agitating people into unrest, just as stirring a liquid agitates it. Alternate translation: “I did not provoke the crowd” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2434	24:13	m3yk			κατηγοροῦσίν	1	“the blames for wrongdoings” or “the charges for crimes”
2435	24:14	c5xa			ὁμολογῶ & τοῦτό σοι	1	“I acknowledge this to you”
2436	24:14	k79p			ὅτι κατὰ τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	The phrase “the Way” was a title used for Christianity during Paul’s time.
2437	24:14	rqu3			λέγουσιν αἵρεσιν	1	This is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism. See how you translated “sect” in Acts 24:5.
2438	24:14	cg73			οὕτως λατρεύω τῷ πατρῴῳ Θεῷ	1	Paul uses the phrase “in that same way” to mean that he, as a believer in Jesus, serves God the same way as their Jewish ancestors did. He is not leading a “sect” or teaching something new that is opposed to their ancient religion.
2439	24:15	nv5a			καὶ αὐτοὶ	1	“as these men have.” Here “these men” refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul in court.
2440	24:15	qza8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων	1	The abstract noun “resurrection” can be stated with the verb “resurrect.” Alternate translation: “that God will resurrect all who have died, both the righteous and the unrighteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2441	24:15	x1yd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	δικαίων & καὶ ἀδίκων	1	These nominal adjectives refer to righteous people and wicked people. AT “righteous people and wicked people” or “those who have done what is right and those who have done what is evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2442	24:16	sfw4			αὐτὸς ἀσκῶ & διὰ παντός	1	“I always work hard” or “I do my best”
2443	24:16	kcg8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπρόσκοπον συνείδησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν	1	Here “conscience” refers to a person’s inner morality that chooses between right and wrong. Alternate translation: “to be blameless” or “to always do what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2444	24:16	va3b			πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν	1	“in the presence of God”
2445	24:17	p92m			δὲ	1	This word marks a shift in Paul’s argument. Here he explains the situation in Jerusalem when some of the Jews arrested him.
2446	24:17	py9v			δι’ ἐτῶν & πλειόνων	1	“after many years away from Jerusalem”
2447	24:17	ryk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου, παρεγενόμην καὶ προσφοράς	1	Here “I came” can be translated as “I went.” Alternate translation: “I went to help my people by bringing them money as a gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2448	24:18	pk2m			ἡγνισμένον ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	“in the temple after I had finished a ceremony to purify myself”
2449	24:18	x6iy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ μετὰ ὄχλου, οὐδὲ μετὰ θορύβου	1	This can be stated as a separate new sentence. Alternate translation: “I had not gathered a crowd nor was I trying to start a riot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2450	24:19	s528			τινὲς	1	“The Jews from Asia”
2451	24:19	ntg3			εἴ τι ἔχοιεν	1	“if they have anything to say”
2452	24:20	npt5				0	Paul finishes responding to Governor Felix about the charges brought against him.
2453	24:20	ag5d			αὐτοὶ	1	This refers to the members of the council who were present in Jerusalem at Paul’s trial.
2454	24:20	hnt9			εἰπάτωσαν, τί εὗρον ἀδίκημα & μου	1	“should say the wrong thing I did that they were able to prove”
2455	24:21	ds1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	The abstract noun “resurrection” can be stated as “God brings back to life.” Alternate translation: “It is because I believe that God will bring back to life those who have died” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2456	24:21	d2lm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2457	24:22	w1tn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names		0	Felix is the Roman governor of the area who resides at Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2458	24:22	a87f			τῆς Ὁδοῦ	1	This is a title for Christianity. See how you translated this in Acts 9:2.
2459	24:22	y3pg			ὅταν Λυσίας ὁ χιλίαρχος καταβῇ	1	“when Lysias the commander comes down” or “at the time Lysias the commander comes down”
2460	24:22	k1f7			Λυσίας	1	This is the name of the chief captain. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:26.
2461	24:22	z5f9			καταβῇ	1	Jerusalem was higher than Caesarea so it was normal for them to speak of coming down from Jerusalem.
2462	24:22	ldi8			διαγνώσομαι τὰ καθ’ ὑμᾶς	1	“I will make a decision concerning these accusations against you” or “I will judge whether you are guilty”
2463	24:23	sxy2			ἔχειν & ἄνεσιν	1	“grant Paul some freedom not otherwise granted to prisoners”
2464	24:24	wus4			μετὰ δὲ ἡμέρας τινὰς	1	“After several days”
2465	24:24	qy9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δρουσίλλῃ, τῇ & γυναικὶ	1	Drusilla is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2466	24:24	xmq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίᾳ	1	This means a female Jew. Alternate translation: “who was a Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2467	24:25	b8v1			ἔμφοβος γενόμενος, ὁ Φῆλιξ	1	Felix may have felt conviction of his sins.
2468	24:25	p8yi			τὸ νῦν ἔχον	1	“for the present time”
2469	24:26	h4v7			χρήματα δοθήσεται αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου	1	Felix was hoping Paul would offer him a bribe to set him free.
2470	24:26	n45p			διὸ καὶ πυκνότερον αὐτὸν μεταπεμπόμενος, ὡμίλει αὐτῷ	1	“so Felix often sent for Paul and spoke with Paul”
2471	24:27	ur2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ὁ & Πόρκιον Φῆστον	1	This was the new roman Governor who replaced Felix. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2472	24:27	p59c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	θέλων & χάριτα καταθέσθαι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	Here “the Jews” refers to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanted the Jewish leaders to like him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2473	24:27	gln6			ὁ Φῆλιξ & κατέλιπε τὸν Παῦλον δεδεμένον	1	“he left Paul in prison”
2474	25:intro	b6uk				0	Acts 25 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Favor This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus “wanted to gain the favor of the Jews,” he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/favor]]) Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.
2475	25:1	c84u				0	Festus becomes the governor of Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 24:27.
2476	25:1	tj76				0	Paul continues to be a prisoner in Caesarea.
2477	25:1	w8h3			οὖν	1	This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
2478	25:1	i7t9			Φῆστος & ἐπιβὰς τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ	1	Possible meanings are (1) Festus arrived in the area to begin his rule or (2) Festus simply arrived in the area.
2479	25:1	zz4l			ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας	1	The phrase “went up” is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
2480	25:2	qnc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνεφάνισάν & οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρῶτοι τῶν Ἰουδαίων κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου	1	This speaks about accusations as if they were an object that a person could bring to someone else. Alternate translation: “The chief priest and the important Jews accused Paul to Festus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2481	25:2	uj5p			παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν	1	Here the word “him” refers to Festus.
2482	25:3	w8um			χάριν κατ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Here the word “him” refers to Paul.
2483	25:3	qz46			ὅπως μεταπέμψηται αὐτὸν εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	This means that Festus would order his soldiers to bring Paul to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “that he might order his soldiers to bring Paul to Jerusalem”
2484	25:3	pg8x			ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν	1	They were going to ambush Paul.
2485	25:4	p3tt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “us” refers to Festus and the Romans traveling with him, but not to his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2486	25:4	v5f9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι	1	This can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “But Festus said, ‘Paul is being held prisoner in Caesarea, and I myself will soon return there.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2487	25:5	a54h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	οἱ οὖν & φησίν, δυνατοὶ συνκαταβάντες	1	The phrase “he said” can be moved to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Then he said, ‘Therefore, those who are able to go to Caesarea should go there with us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2488	25:5	iz98			εἴ τί ἐστιν ἐν τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἄτοπον	1	“If Paul has done something wrong”
2489	25:5	nei6			κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ	1	“you should accuse him of violating laws” or “you should bring charges against him”
2490	25:6	fi27				0	Here the first three times the word “he” is used as well as the word “him,” the words refer to Festus. The fourth word “he” refers to Paul. The word “they” refers to the Jews who came from Jerusalem.
2491	25:6	s69c			καταβὰς εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	Jerusalem is higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of coming down from Jerusalem.
2492	25:6	qv24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	Here “judgment seat” refers to Festus’ ruling as judge over Paul’s trial. Alternate translation: “sat upon the seat where he acted as judge” or “he sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2493	25:6	j7c5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “his soldiers bring Paul to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2494	25:7	v4v8			παραγενομένου δὲ αὐτοῦ	1	“When he came and stood before Festus”
2495	25:7	e7g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πολλὰ & βαρέα αἰτιώματα καταφέροντες	1	Charging a person with a crime is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could bring to court. Alternate translation: “they spoke against Paul many serious things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2496	25:8	hc3w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	Paul says he did not break any rules about who could enter the Jerusalem temple. Alternate translation: “against the entry rules of the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2497	25:9	m49r				0	Paul asks to be taken before Caesar for judgment.
2498	25:9	b49x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι	1	Here “the Jews” means the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanted to please the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2499	25:9	qe8h			εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς	1	Jerusalem was higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of going up to Jerusalem.
2500	25:9	wi2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “where I will judge you with regard to these charges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2501	25:10	u1ef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι	1	The “judgment seat” refers to Caesar’s authority to judge Paul. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I ask to go before Caesar, so he can judge me” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2502	25:11	el9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	οὖν ἀδικῶ καὶ ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι, οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν; εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου, οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι	1	Paul is stating a hypothetical situation. If he were guilty, he would accept the punishment, but he knows that he is not guilty. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
2503	25:11	ta55			εἰ & ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι	1	“if I have done some wrong that deserves the death penalty”
2504	25:11	hxr1			οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν	1	“if the charges against me are not true”
2505	25:11	hr23			οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι	1	Possible meanings are (1) Festus does not have the legal authority to hand Paul over to these false accusers or (2) Paul was saying that if he has done nothing wrong, the governor should not give into the request of the Jews.
2506	25:11	b1bf			Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι	1	“I ask that I go before Caesar so he can judge me”
2507	25:12	t96z			μετὰ τοῦ συμβουλίου	1	This is not the Sanhedrin that is referred to as “council” throughout Acts. This is a political council in the Roman government. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors”
2508	25:13	izu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants		0	King Agrippa and Bernice are new people in the story. Though he ruled over only a few territories, King Agrippa is the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice is Agrippa’s sister.(See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/writing-participants]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2509	25:13	ge5h				0	Festus explains Paul’s case to King Agrippa.
2510	25:13	c3gc			δὲ	1	This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
2511	25:13	ukd3			ἀσπασάμενοι τὸν Φῆστον	1	“to visit Festus concerning official matters”
2512	25:14	x8jf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “When Felix left office, he left a man in prison here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2513	25:14	z7yw			Φήλικος	1	Felix was the Roman governor of the area who resided in Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:24.
2514	25:15	b6hx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περὶ οὗ & ἐνεφάνισαν	1	To charge someone in court is spoken of as if it were an object that a person brings to court. Alternate translation: “spoke to me against this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2515	25:15	hyp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην	1	The abstract nouns “sentence” and “condemnation” can be expressed as verbs. The phrase “a sentence of condemnation” implies that they were requesting that Paul be executed. Alternate translation: “they asked me to sentence him to death” or “they asked me to condemn him to death” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2516	25:16	e4tk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	χαρίζεσθαί τινα ἄνθρωπον	1	Here “hand over” represents sending someone to people who will punish or kill him. Alternate translation: “let someone punish anyone” or “to condemn anyone to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2517	25:16	xjb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος, κατὰ πρόσωπον & τοὺς κατηγόρους	1	Here “faced his accusers” is an idiom that means to meet with the people who accuse him. Alternate translation: “before the person whom others have accused of a crime had met directly with those who accused him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2518	25:17	z6g2			οὖν	1	“Because what I have just said is true.” Fetus had just said that an accused man should be able to face his accusers and make his defense.
2519	25:17	rm5z			συνελθόντων & ἐνθάδε	1	“when the Jewish leaders came to meet with me here”
2520	25:17	efe2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	Here “judgment seat” refers to Festus ruling over Paul’s trial as judge. Alternate translation: “I sat upon the seat to act as judge” or “I sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2521	25:17	hm6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to bring Paul before me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2522	25:19	d1qm			τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας	1	Here “religion” means the belief system people have toward life and the supernatural.
2523	25:20	y9bv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων	1	To “stand trial” is an idiom meaning to speak to a judge so the judge can decide if a person is right or wrong. Alternate translation: “to go to trial about these charges” or “for a judge to decide if these charges against him are true or not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2524	25:21	yli3				0	Festus finishes explaining Paul’s case to King Agrippa.
2525	25:21	ie7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ δὲ Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ διάγνωσιν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul insisted that he stay under Roman guard until the time when the emperor could decide his case” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2526	25:21	ceq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to keep him in custody” or “I told the soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2527	25:22	t322		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	αὔριον, φησίν, ἀκούσῃ αὐτοῦ	1	The phrase “Festus said” can be moved to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Festus said, ‘I will arrange for you to listen to Paul tomorrow.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2528	25:23	y1yj				0	Though he ruled over only a few territories, Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice was his sister. See how you translated these names in Acts 25:13.
2529	25:23	qlm5				0	Festus again gives information about Paul’s case to King Agrippa.
2530	25:23	yw76			μετὰ πολλῆς φαντασίας	1	“with a great ceremony to honor them”
2531	25:23	ldb7			τὸ ἀκροατήριον	1	This was a large room where people gathered for ceremonies, trials, and other events.
2532	25:23	at4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul to appear before them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2533	25:24	n8qj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	The word “all” is an exaggeration used to emphasize that a great number of Jews wanted Paul to die. Alternate translation: “a great number of the Jews” or “many of the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2534	25:24	ae3v			βοῶντες	1	“they spoke very strongly to me”
2535	25:24	yv2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι	1	This statement is made in the negative to emphasize the positive equivalent. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2536	25:25	fe2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here the first “you” is plural; the second “you” is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2537	25:25	f6hy			δὲ τούτου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τὸν Σεβαστὸν	1	“because he said that he wanted the emperor to judge him”
2538	25:25	g856			τὸν Σεβαστὸν	1	The emperor was the ruler of the Roman empire. He ruled over many countries and provinces.
2539	25:26	jcq2			προήγαγον αὐτὸν ἐφ’ ὑμῶν, καὶ μάλιστα ἐπὶ σοῦ, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα	1	“I have brought Paul to all of you, but especially to you, King Agrippa.”
2540	25:26	rhy2			ὅπως & σχῶ τι γράψω	1	“so that I will have something else to write” or “so that I will know what I should write”
2541	25:27	txs6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἄλογον & μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ & σημᾶναι	1	The negative words “unreasonable” and “to not” can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me that if I send a prisoner then I should also state” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2542	25:27	xm65			τὰς κατ’ αὐτοῦ αἰτίας	1	Possible meanings are (1) the accusations that the Jewish leaders have brought against him or (2) the charges under Roman law that apply to Paul’s case.
2543	26:intro	e2q6				0	Acts 26 General Notes Structure and formatting This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 22) Paul told the King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and that the governor should not punish him for that. Special concepts in this chapter Light and darkness The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
2544	26:1	b34d				0	Festus has brought Paul before King Agrippa. In verse 2, Paul gives his defense to King Agrippa.
2545	26:1	gz9f			Ἀγρίππας	1	Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine, though he ruled over only a few territories. See how you translated this name in Acts 25:13.
2546	26:1	wme6			ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα	1	“held out his hand” or “gestured with his hand”
2547	26:1	vni8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀπελογεῖτο	1	The abstract noun “defense” can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “began to defend himself against those who were accusing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2548	26:2	ha47			ἥγημαι ἐμαυτὸν μακάριον	1	Paul was happy because he considered his appearance before Agrippa to be an opportunity to speak about the gospel.
2549	26:2	xhz1			ἀπολογεῖσθαι	1	This phrase means to describe one’s situation, so that those in court can discuss and make a decision about it. Alternate translation: “to defend myself”
2550	26:2	mdq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	The abstract noun “accusations” can be stated as the verb “accuse.” Alternate translation: “against all the Jews who are accusing me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2551	26:2	cbr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	Ἰουδαίων	1	This does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2552	26:3	kns2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζητημάτων	1	You can make explicit what kinds of questions this means. Alternate translation: “questions about religious matters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2553	26:4	t8bg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	This is a generalization. Possible meanings are (1) this refers to Jews in general who knew about Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jews” or (2) this refers to Pharisees who knew Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2554	26:4	x96h			ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου	1	Possible meanings are (1) among his own people, not necessarily in the geographical land of Israel or (2) in the land of Israel.
2555	26:5	y9a1			τὴν ἀκριβεστάτην αἵρεσιν τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας	1	“a group within Judaism who live by very strict rules”
2556	26:6	xkp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here “you” is plural and refers to the people who were listening to Paul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2557	26:6	s9kr			νῦν	1	This word marks a shift from Paul discussing his past to talking about himself in the present.
2558	26:6	i9y5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἕστηκα κρινόμενος	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I am here, where they are putting me on trial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2559	26:6	r42g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This speaks about a promise as if it were something a person could look for and see. Alternate translation: “I am waiting expectantly for God to do what he promised our forefathers he would do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2560	26:7	hnf1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς ἣν τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν & ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι	1	The phrase “our twelve tribes” stands for the people in those tribes. Alternate translation: “This is also what our fellow Jews in the twelve tribes were waiting for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2561	26:7	apf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς ἣν & ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι	1	This speaks about a promise as if it were an object that can be received. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2562	26:7	kzg4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν λατρεῦον	1	The extremes “night” and “day” mean they “worshiped God continually.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2563	26:7	c4lm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	This does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: “that the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2564	26:8	de83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει	1	Paul uses a question to challenge the Jews present. They believe God can raise the dead but do not think God brought Jesus back to life. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “None of you think it is unbelievable that God raises the dead.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2565	26:8	ukk6			νεκροὺς ἐγείρει	1	Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “makes dead people come alive again”
2566	26:9	hm33			μὲν οὖν	1	Paul uses this phrase to mark another shift in his defense. He is now beginning to describe how he formerly persecuted Jesus’ people.
2567	26:9	r4df		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πρὸς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ & ἐναντία	1	The word “name” here stands for the teaching about the person. Alternate translation: “to stop people from teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2568	26:10	nys7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναιρουμένων & αὐτῶν, κατήνεγκα ψῆφον	1	The phrase “were killed” can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I voted in agreement with the other Jewish leaders to condemn believers to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2569	26:11	rri6			πολλάκις τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς	1	Possible meanings are (1) Paul punished some believers many times or (2) Paul punished many different believers.
2570	26:12	p55i				0	While talking to King Agrippa, Paul tells about when the Lord spoke with him.
2571	26:12	us8d			ἐν οἷς	1	Paul uses this phrase to mark another shift in his defense. He is now telling about when he saw Jesus and became his disciple.
2572	26:12	h3ic			ἐν οἷς	1	This word is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. In this case, Paul went to Damascus during the time when he persecuted Christians.
2573	26:12	ajp6			μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς	1	Paul had written letters from the Jewish leaders, granting him authority to persecute the Jewish believers.
2574	26:14	sip5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με	1	Here “voice” stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone speaking to me who said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2575	26:14	du3t			Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις	1	This is a rhetorical question. The speaker is alerting Saul to what Saul is doing to him, and implying that Saul should not do that. Alternate translation: “Saul, Saul, you are persecuting me.” or “Saul, Saul, stop persecuting me.” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
2576	26:14	zsi2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν	1	For Paul to resist Jesus and to persecute believers is spoken of as if he were an ox kicking at the sharp stick that a person uses to prod (or “goad”) the animal. It means that Paul is only harming himself. Alternate translation: “You will only harm yourself like an ox kicking a goad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2577	26:15	h2ws				0	Paul continues giving his defense to King Agrippa. In these verses he continues quoting his conversation with the Lord.
2578	26:18	fk1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν	1	Helping people to understand the truth is spoken of as if a person were literally helping someone to open his eyes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2579	26:18	gw8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς	1	Helping someone to stop doing what is evil and to start trusting and obeying God is spoken of as if the person is literally leading someone out of a dark place into a place of light. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2580	26:18	q3h8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ & τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ	1	Helping someone to stop obeying Satan and to start obeying God is spoken of as if a person were literally turning a person and taking them from the place where Satan rules and leading him to the place where God rules. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2581	26:18	m65i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1	The abstract noun “forgiveness” can be stated as the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “God may forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2582	26:18	m9ve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κλῆρον	1	The blessings that Jesus gives to those who believe in him are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that children receive from their father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2583	26:18	c5ij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ	1	Jesus choosing some people to belong to him is spoken of as if he literally set them apart from other people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2584	26:18	bgc5			πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ	1	“because they believe in me.” Here Paul finishes quoting the Lord.
2585	26:19	ljx2			ὅθεν	1	“Because what I have just said is true.” Paul had just explained what the Lord had commanded him in his vision.
2586	26:19	zv2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἐγενόμην	1	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “I obeyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2587	26:19	sn4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ	1	This refers to what the person in the vision told Paul. Alternate translation: “what the person from heaven told me in the vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2588	26:20	fei4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	To start trusting God is spoken of as if a person turns to start walking toward God. Alternate translation: “trust in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2589	26:20	h1v2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας	1	The abstract noun “repentance” can be stated as the verb “repented.” Alternate translation: “and start doing good deeds to show they truly have repented” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2590	26:21	tl6t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	Ἰουδαῖοι	1	This does not mean all of the Jews. Alternate translation: “some Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2591	26:22	n5hn				0	Paul finishes giving his defense to King Agrippa.
2592	26:22	t8f4			μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ, οὐδὲν	1	Here “common people” and “great ones” are used together to mean “all people.” Alternate translation: “to all people, whether common or great, about nothing” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism)
2593	26:22	f6py			οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς & ὧν	1	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “about the exact thing that”
2594	26:22	i9ki			ὧν τε οἱ προφῆται	1	Paul is referring to the collective writings of the Old Testament prophets.
2595	26:23	pe9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός	1	You can make explicit that Christ must also die. Alternate translation: “that Christ must suffer and die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2596	26:23	p9t8			ἐξ ἀναστάσεως	1	to come back to life
2597	26:23	sc5f			νεκρῶν	1	The phrase “the dead” refers to the spirits of people who have died. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
2598	26:23	z2ms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν	1	“he would proclaim the message about the light.” To tell people about how God saves people is spoken of as if a person were speaking about the light. Alternate translation: “he would proclaim the message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2599	26:24	h5b9				0	Paul and King Agrippa continue to talk together.
2600	26:24	dvn2			μαίνῃ	1	“you are speaking nonsense” or “you are crazy”
2601	26:24	tk27			τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει	1	“you have learned so much that you are now crazy”
2602	26:25	dur9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μαίνομαι & ἀλλὰ	1	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “I am sane … and” or “I am able to think well … and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2603	26:25	a6pb			κράτιστε Φῆστε	1	“Festus, who deserves highest honors”
2604	26:26	ed7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	γὰρ & ὁ βασιλεύς, πρὸς ὃν & αὐτὸν	1	Paul is still speaking to King Agrippa, but he is referring to him in the third person. Alternate translation: “For you … to you … from you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2605	26:26	cs7b			παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ	1	Paul was not afraid to speak to the king about Christ. Alternate translation: “I speak boldly”
2606	26:26	svn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πείθομαι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I am sure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2607	26:26	tta8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λανθάνειν & αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ	1	This can be stated in active and positive form. Alternate translation: “that he is aware of this” or “that you are aware of this” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2608	26:26	v1uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ & ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “has not happened in a corner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2609	26:26	i5wg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν γωνίᾳ	1	This means doing something in secret as if a person went and did something in the corner of a room where no one can see him. Alternate translation: “in a dark place” or “in secret” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2610	26:27	a4a2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις	1	Paul asks this question to remind Agrippa that Agrippa already believes what the prophets said about Jesus. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2611	26:28	y8qq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι	1	Agrippa asks this question to show Paul that he cannot convince Agrippa so easily without more proof. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you do not think you can convince me so easily to believe in Jesus!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2612	26:29	k7kq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων	1	Here “prison chains” stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “but, of course, I do no want you to be a prisoner like I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2613	26:30	k7jh				0	Bernice was the sister of King Agrippa (Acts 25:13).
2614	26:30	gaq5				0	This ends Paul’s time before King Agrippa.
2615	26:30	u8vl			ἀνέστη τε ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμὼν	1	“Then King Agrippa stood up, and Governor Festus”
2616	26:31	blz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	The abstract noun “death” can be stated as the verb “die.” Here “bonds” stands for being in prison. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or to be in prison” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2617	26:32	n293		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “This man could have gone free” or “I could have freed this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2618	27:intro	r82x				0	Acts 27 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Sailing People who lived near the sea traveled by boat powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible. Trust Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailers and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]]) Paul breaks bread Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.
2619	27:1	efe4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Adramyttium was a city possibly located on the west coast of modern-day Turkey. The word “we” includes the author of Acts, Paul, and the others traveling with Paul, but not the reader. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2620	27:1	dyf5				0	Paul, as a prisoner, begins his journey to Rome.
2621	27:1	b2yz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς & ἐκρίθη	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “When the king and the governor decided” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2622	27:1	yv84			ἀποπλεῖν & εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν	1	Italy is the name of the province Rome was in. See how you translated “Italy” in Acts 18:2.
2623	27:1	s6ny			παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας, ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ, σπείρης Σεβαστῆς	1	“they put a centurion named Julius, of the Imperial Regiment, in charge of Paul and some other prisoners”
2624	27:1	k52u			παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας	1	Possible meanings are that (1) “they” refers to the governor and the king or (2) “they” refers to other Roman officials.
2625	27:1	un2s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ	1	Julius is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2626	27:1	d22f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	σπείρης Σεβαστῆς	1	This was the name of the battalion or army from which the centurion came. Some versions translate this as “the Augustan Regiment.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2627	27:2	dnr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπιβάντες & πλοίῳ & μέλλοντι πλεῖν	1	Here “ship … which was about to sail” stands for the crew that will sail the ship. Alternate translation: “We boarded a ship … which a crew was about to sail” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2628	27:2	fqy2			πλοίῳ Ἀδραμυντηνῷ	1	Possible meanings are (1) a ship that had come from Adramyttium or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Adramyttium.
2629	27:2	f8pf			μέλλοντι πλεῖν	1	“soon going to sail” or “would depart soon”
2630	27:2	m3ps			ἀνήχθημεν	1	“began our journey on the sea”
2631	27:2	h3uy			Ἀριστάρχου	1	Aristarchus came from Macedonia but had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in Acts 19:29.
2632	27:3	r71e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2633	27:3	u6lt			φιλανθρώπως & ὁ Ἰούλιος τῷ Παύλῳ χρησάμενος	1	“Julius treated Paul with a friendly concern.” See how you translated “Julius” in Acts 27:1.
2634	27:3	rp73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς τοὺς φίλους πορευθέντι, ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν	1	The abstract noun “care” can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “go to his friends so they could care for him” or “go to his friends so they could help him with whatever he needed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2635	27:4	d4hg			ἀναχθέντες, ὑπεπλεύσαμεν	1	“we started sailing and went”
2636	27:4	mjt8			ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον	1	“the lee of Cyprus” is the side of that island that blocks the strong wind, so sailing vessels are not forced off their course.
2637	27:5	g1t7			Παμφυλίαν	1	This was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
2638	27:5	y6m6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας	1	You can make explicit that they got off of the ship in Myra. Alternate translation: “came to Myra, a city of Lycia, where we got off the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2639	27:5	ni2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα	1	Myra is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2640	27:5	uaf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Λυκίας	1	Lycia was a Roman province, located on the southwestern coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2641	27:6	j4cf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εὑρὼν & πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν	1	It is implied that a crew would sail the ship to Italy. Alternate translation: “found a ship that a crew had sailed from Alexandria and was about to sail to Italy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2642	27:6	fdq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀλεξανδρῖνον	1	This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2643	27:7	zzw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δὲ & βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι	1	You can make explicit that the reason they were sailing slowly and with difficulty was because the wind was blowing against them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2644	27:7	pye5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον	1	This is an ancient settlement located in modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2645	27:7	hhf1			μὴ προσεῶντος ἡμᾶς τοῦ ἀνέμου	1	“we could no longer go that way because of the strong wind”
2646	27:7	b746			ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κρήτην	1	“so we sailed along the side of Crete where there was less wind”
2647	27:7	mq4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	κατὰ Σαλμώνην	1	This is a coastal city in Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2648	27:8	p4ri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μόλις & παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν	1	You can make explicit that even though the winds were not as strong as before, they were still strong enough to make sailing difficult. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2649	27:8	a64y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Καλοὺς Λιμένας	1	This was a port near Lasea, located on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2650	27:8	n7re		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἐγγὺς πόλις ἦν Λασαία	1	This is a coastal city in Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2651	27:9	ea4l			ἱκανοῦ & χρόνου διαγενομένου	1	Because of the direction the wind was blowing, the journey from Caesarea to Fair Havens had taken more time than planned.
2652	27:9	vlu4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	διαγενομένου	1	The writer includes himself, Paul, and those who were traveling with them, but not the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2653	27:9	u6x5			καὶ ὄντος ἤδη ἐπισφαλοῦς τοῦ πλοὸς, διὰ τὸ καὶ τὴν νηστείαν ἤδη παρεληλυθέναι	1	This fast took place on the Day of Atonement, which was usually either in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars. After this time, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms.
2654	27:10	p29v			θεωρῶ ὅτι μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας & μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν	1	“if we travel now, we will suffer much injury and loss”
2655	27:10	nx9c			ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν	1	Here “loss” means destruction when referring to things and death when referring to people.
2656	27:10	q9xt			οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου	1	Cargo is something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. Alternate translation: “not only the ship and the goods on the ship”
2657	27:11	b1kz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that Paul said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2658	27:12	l2n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνευθέτου & τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν	1	You can make explicit why it was not easy to stay in the harbor. Alternate translation: “harbor did not sufficiently protect docked ships during winter storms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2659	27:12	jmi3			λιμένος	1	a place near land that is usually safe for ships
2660	27:12	k2ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φοίνικα	1	Phoenix is a city port on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2661	27:12	z1lf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παραχειμάσαι	1	This speaks about the season of winter as if it were a commodity that someone can spend. Alternate translation: “to stay there for the cold season” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2662	27:12	x6vl			βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον	1	Here “faces northwest and southwest” means the opening of the harbor was toward those directions. Alternate translation: “it opened to the northwest and southwest”
2663	27:12	gyd2			λίβα καὶ & χῶρον	1	These directions are based on the rising and setting sun. Northeast is a little to the left of the rising sun. Southeast is a little to the right of the rising sun. Some versions say “northeast and southeast.”
2664	27:13	xx67			ἄραντες	1	Here “weighed” means to pull out of the water. An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea keeping the ship from drifting about.
2665	27:14	hv8h				0	Paul and those traveling on the boat encounter a fierce storm.
2666	27:14	m2xe			μετ’ οὐ πολὺ	1	“after a little while”
2667	27:14	fs4z			ἄνεμος τυφωνικὸς	1	“a very strong, dangerous wind”
2668	27:14	g1ek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	καλούμενος Εὐρακύλων	1	“called ‘a strong wind from the northeast.’” The word for “the northeaster” in the original language is “Euroclydon.” You can transliterate this word for your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
2669	27:14	tz2k			ἔβαλεν κατ’ αὐτῆς	1	“came in from the island of Crete, and it blew strongly against our ship”
2670	27:15	fxp1			συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ	1	“When the wind blew so strongly against the front of the ship that we could not sail against it”
2671	27:15	w1hl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπιδόντες ἐφερόμεθα	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “we stopped trying to sail forward, and we let the wind push us whichever way it blew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2672	27:16	c4cg			νησίον & τι ὑποδραμόντες	1	“We sailed on the side of the island where the wind was not so strong”
2673	27:16	aq56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	νησίον & τι ὑποδραμόντες	1	This island was located on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2674	27:16	h9z2			σκάφης	1	This is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship, and sometimes it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship.
2675	27:17	v9ag			ἣν ἄραντες	1	“they had lifted up the lifeboat” or “they had pulled the lifeboat aboard the ship”
2676	27:17	tx1f			βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον	1	The “hull” is the body of the ship. They tied ropes around it so that the ship would not come apart during the storm.
2677	27:17	dvv4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Σύρτιν	1	Sandbars are very shallow areas in the sea where ships can get stuck in the sand. Syrtis is located on the coast of Libya, northern Africa. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2678	27:17	l8kl			χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος	1	They put the ship’s anchor in the water in order to slow down where the wind would blow them.
2679	27:17	v6dn			σκεῦος	1	An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea keeping the ship from drifting about. See how you translated this in Acts 27:13.
2680	27:17	g7rw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐφέροντο	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “had to go in whatever direction the wind blew us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2681	27:18	fx4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σφοδρῶς & χειμαζομένων	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The wind blew us roughly back and forth that all of us were badly battered and bruised by the storm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2682	27:18	nd5h			ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο	1	“they” is the sailors. This is done to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent the ship from sinking.
2683	27:18	ny6k			ἐκβολὴν	1	Cargo is something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. See how you translated this in Acts 27:10. Alternate translation: “goods on the ship”
2684	27:19	vm2k			αὐτόχειρες τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν	1	Here “equipment” refers to the sailors’ equipment needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates how desperate the situation was.
2685	27:20	if7a			μήτε δὲ ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας	1	They could not see the sun and stars because of the dark storm clouds. Sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and what direction they were headed.
2686	27:20	p2wd			χειμῶνός & οὐκ ὀλίγου ἐπικειμένου	1	“the terrible storm still blew us roughly back and forth”
2687	27:20	mnj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone stopped hoping we would survive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2688	27:21	mmb2				0	Paul speaks to the sailors on the ship.
2689	27:21	d1le		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης	1	Here “they” refers to the sailors. It is implied that Luke, Paul, and those with them had not eaten either. Alternate translation: “When we had gone a long time without food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2690	27:21	zns2			μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1	“among the men”
2691	27:21	bc1x			κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν	1	“and as a result suffer this harm and loss”
2692	27:22	d95r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποβολὴ & ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν	1	Paul is speaking to the sailors. It is implied that Paul also means that he and those with him will not die either. Alternate translation: “none of us will die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2693	27:22	djh4			πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου	1	Here “loss” is used in the sense of destroy. Alternate translation: “but the storm will destroy only the ship”
2694	27:24	z1j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι	1	The phrase “stand before Caesar” refers to Paul’s going to court and letting Caesar judge him. Alternate translation: “You must stand before Caesar so he can judge you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2695	27:24	s3wv			κεχάρισταί σοι & πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ	1	“has decided to allow all those who are sailing with you to live”
2696	27:25	r9t8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “just as the angel told me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2697	27:26	vmp6			εἰς νῆσον & τινα, δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἐκπεσεῖν	1	“we must steer our boat so that it wrecks on some island”
2698	27:27	im34				0	The fierce storm continues.
2699	27:27	rrm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὡς δὲ τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ ἐγένετο	1	The ordinal number “fourteenth” can be translated as “fourteen” or “14.” Alternate translation: “After 14 days since the storm started, that night” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2700	27:27	la7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διαφερομένων ἡμῶν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “as the wind blew us back and forth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2701	27:27	afs6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ	1	This is the sea between Italy and Greece. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2702	27:28	ruj1			βολίσαντες	1	“They measured the depth of the sea water.” They measured the depth of water by dropping a line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water.
2703	27:28	tq53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	εὗρον ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι	1	“found 20 fathoms.” A “fathom” is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: “found 40 meters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2704	27:28	ig3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	εὗρον ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε	1	“found 15 fathoms.” A “fathom” is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: “found 30 meters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2705	27:29	b1qc			ἀγκύρας	1	An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. See how you translated this in Acts 27:13.
2706	27:29	q4am			ἐκ πρύμνης	1	“from the back of the ship”
2707	27:30	br71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here the word “you” is plural and refers to the centurion and the Roman soldiers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2708	27:30	b4wv			τὴν σκάφην	1	This is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship and sometime it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship. See how you translated this in Acts 27:16.
2709	27:30	rr89			ἐκ πρῴρης	1	“from the front of the ship”
2710	27:31	ez5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ οὗτοι μείνωσιν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε	1	The negative words “Unless” and “cannot” can be stated in positive form. The passive phrase “be saved” can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “These men must stay in the ship in order for you to survive” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2711	27:33	q3y8			ἄχρι δὲ οὗ ἡμέρα ἤμελλεν γίνεσθαι	1	“When it was almost sunrise”
2712	27:33	j5yg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν	1	The ordinal number “fourteenth” can be stated as “fourteen.” Alternate translation: “For 14 days” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2713	27:34	j3qx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐδενὸς & ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται	1	This was a customary way of saying no harm would come upon them. Alternate translation: “every one of you will survive this disaster unharmed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2714	27:35	yh7y			κλάσας	1	“tore the bread” or “tore off a piece from the loaf of bread”
2715	27:36	zt9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὔθυμοι δὲ γενόμενοι πάντες	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “This encouraged all of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2716	27:37	ynq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	ἤμεθα δὲ αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ	1	“We were two hundred and seventy-six people in the ship.” This is background information. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2717	27:39	vdk2			κόλπον	1	a large area of water partly surrounded by land
2718	27:39	r1bx			τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον	1	“saw land but could not recognize it as any place they knew”
2719	27:40	k66v			τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες, εἴων	1	“cut the ropes and left the anchors behind”
2720	27:40	ntr9			πηδαλίων	1	large oars or pieces of wood at the back of the ship used for steering
2721	27:40	cn2w			τὸν ἀρτέμωνα	1	“the sail at the front of the ship.” The sail was a large piece of cloth that catches the wind to move the ship.
2722	27:40	pa1k			κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν	1	“they steered the ship toward the beach”
2723	27:41	y22n			περιπεσόντες & εἰς τόπον διθάλασσον	1	A current is water flowing in one continuous direction. Sometimes more than one water current can flow across another. This may cause the sand under the water to pile up making the water more shallow.
2724	27:41	cpu5			πρῷρα	1	“The front of the ship”
2725	27:41	v35z			ἡ & πρύμνα	1	“the back of the ship”
2726	27:42	qul7			τῶν & στρατιωτῶν, βουλὴ ἐγένετο	1	“The soldiers were planning”
2727	27:43	s2sz			ἐκώλυσεν αὐτοὺς τοῦ βουλήματος	1	“so he stopped them from doing what they planned to do”
2728	27:43	br8u			ἀπορίψαντας	1	“jump off the ship into the water”
2729	27:44	hw7p			οὓς & ἐπὶ σανίσιν	1	“some on wooden boards”
2730	28:intro	w8yn				0	Acts 28 General Notes Structure and formatting No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years. Special concepts in this chapter “Letters” and “brothers” The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming. When the Jewish leaders spoke of “brothers,” they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “He was a god” The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.
2731	28:1	p1bd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Paul, the writer, and those who traveled with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2732	28:1	twx8				0	After the shipwreck, people on the island of Malta helped Paul and everyone on the ship. They stay there for 3 months.
2733	28:1	j1yf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ διασωθέντες	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “When we arrived safely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2734	28:1	tt1i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐπέγνωμεν	1	Paul and Luke learned the name of the island. Alternate translation: “we learned from the people” or “we found out from the residents” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2735	28:1	f8y4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται	1	Malta is an island located south of the modern-day island of Sicily. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2736	28:2	e7w6			οἵ & βάρβαροι	1	“The local people”
2737	28:2	v8yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρεῖχαν οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν ἡμῖν	1	Being kind to someone is spoken of as if it were an object that someone offers. Alternate translation: “were not only very kind to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2738	28:2	r7jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν	1	This phrase is used to emphasize the opposite of what is said. Alternate translation: “a great deal of kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2739	28:2	z9cp			ἅψαντες & πυρὰν	1	“they put together twigs and branches and burned them”
2740	28:2	itw2			προσελάβοντο πάντας ἡμᾶς	1	Possible meanings are (1) “welcomed all of the people from the ship” or (2) “welcomed Paul and all his companions.”
2741	28:3	g4ad			ἔχιδνα ἀπὸ τῆς θέρμης ἐξελθοῦσα	1	“a poisonous snake came out of the bundle of sticks”
2742	28:3	xmx4			καθῆψε τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	“bit Paul’s hand and did not let go”
2743	28:4	ye7h			πάντως φονεύς ἐστιν ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	“For sure, this man is a murderer” or “This man is truly a murderer”
2744	28:4	ma1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ δίκη & εἴασεν	1	The word “justice” refers to the name of a god that they worshiped. Alternate translation: “the god called Justice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2745	28:5	q5i3			ἀποτινάξας τὸ θηρίον εἰς τὸ πῦρ	1	“shook his hand so that the snake fell from his hand into the fire”
2746	28:5	asr8			ἔπαθεν οὐδὲν κακόν	1	“Paul was not hurt at all”
2747	28:6	m11i			πίμπρασθαι	1	Possible meanings are (1) his body would swell because of the snake venom or (2) he would become very hot with fever.
2748	28:6	i6i6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον	1	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “everything about him was as it should be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2749	28:6	u81u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μεταβαλόμενοι	1	To think differently about a situation is spoken of as if a person is changing his mind. Alternate translation: “they thought again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2750	28:6	cfe9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν	1	This can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “said, ‘This man must be a god.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2751	28:6	d1rj			ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν	1	Perhaps there was a belief that someone who lived after a poisonous snake bite was divine or a god.
2752	28:7	f4sa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the words “us” and we” refer to Paul, Luke, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2753	28:7	r95r			ἐν δὲ τοῖς περὶ τὸν τόπον ἐκεῖνον	1	“Now” is used to introduce a new person or event in the account.
2754	28:7	wx6t			πρώτῳ τῆς νήσου	1	Possible meanings are (1) the main leader of the people or (2) someone who was the most important person on the island, perhaps because of his wealth.
2755	28:7	wh2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ὀνόματι Ποπλίῳ	1	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2756	28:8	g12t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἐγένετο δὲ, τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι	1	This is background information about Publius’ father that is important to understanding the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2757	28:8	m154		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “was ill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2758	28:8	fr46			πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι	1	Dysentery is an infectious intestinal disease.
2759	28:8	pwk5			ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ	1	“touched him with his hands”
2760	28:9	yk6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐθεραπεύοντο	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he healed them too” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2761	28:10	ydg4			πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς	1	Probably they honored Paul and those with him by giving them gifts.
2762	28:11	jc5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit		0	The Twin Brothers refers to Castor and Pollux, the twin sons of Zeus, a Greek god. They were thought to be protectors of ships. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2763	28:11	be1c				0	Paul’s journey to Rome continues.
2764	28:11	qi6e			παρακεχειμακότι ἐν τῇ νήσῳ	1	“that the crew left at the island for the cold season”
2765	28:11	cm2t			Ἀλεξανδρίνῳ	1	Possible meanings are this refers to (1) a ship that came from Alexandria, or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Alexandria.
2766	28:11	em5p			Διοσκούροις	1	On the bow of the ship, there was a carving of the two idols called “the twin gods.” Their names were Castor and Pollux.
2767	28:12	w5c6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συρακούσας	1	Syracuse is a city on the southeast coast of the modern-day island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2768	28:13	se8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names		0	The Market of Appius and The Three Taverns was a popular market and inn on the main highway called the Appian Way, about 50 kilometers south of the city of Rome. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2769	28:13	z2u4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ῥήγιον	1	This is the port city located at the southwestern tip of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2770	28:13	p633			ἐπιγενομένου νότου	1	“the wind began to blow from the south”
2771	28:13	tz4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ποτιόλους	1	Puteoli is located in modern-day Naples on the west coast of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2772	28:14	m1is			οὗ εὑρόντες	1	“There we met”
2773	28:14	n3tw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὺς	1	These were followers of Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2774	28:14	a2c5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρεκλήθημεν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they invited us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2775	28:14	bc3j			καὶ οὕτως εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην ἤλθαμεν	1	Once Paul reached Puteoli, the rest of the journey to Rome was on land. Alternate translation: “And after we stayed seven days with them, we went to Rome”
2776	28:15	k754			ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν	1	“after they heard we were coming”
2777	28:15	m9tz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εὐχαριστήσας τῷ Θεῷ, ἔλαβε θάρσος	1	Taking courage is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could take. Alternate translation: “this encouraged him, and he thanked God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2778	28:16	fib2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2779	28:16	hf2t				0	Paul arrives in Rome as a prisoner but with the freedom to stay in his own place. He calls the local Jews together to explain what has happened to him.
2780	28:16	te8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅτε δὲ εἰσήλθομεν εἰς Ῥώμην	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “After we had arrived in Rome, the Roman authorities gave Paul permission to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2781	28:17	vf7r			ἐγένετο δὲ	1	This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2782	28:17	d77z			τῶν Ἰουδαίων πρώτους	1	These are the Jewish civil or religious leaders present in Rome.
2783	28:17	e1dd			ἀδελφοί	1	Here this means “Fellow Jews.”
2784	28:17	g55i			ἐναντίον & τῷ λαῷ	1	“against our people” or “against the Jews”
2785	28:17	hgk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews arrested me in Jerusalem and placed me in the custody of the Roman authorities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2786	28:17	x3r2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων	1	Here “hands” stands for power or control. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2787	28:18	fed7			τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί	1	“I had done nothing to cause them to execute me”
2788	28:19	lr96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	This does not mean all of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2789	28:19	zk8f			ἀντιλεγόντων	1	“complained about what the Roman authorities wanted to do”
2790	28:19	n6vf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠναγκάσθην ἐπικαλέσασθαι Καίσαρα	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I had to ask for Caesar to judge me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2791	28:19	e7gr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐχ ὡς τοῦ ἔθνους μου ἔχων τι κατηγορεῖν	1	The abstract noun “accusation” can be stated as the verb “accuse.” Here “nation” stands for the people. Alternate translation: “but it was not because I wanted to accuse the people of my nation before Caesar” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2792	28:20	b1fd			τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	Possible meanings are (1) the people of Israel confidently expect the Messiah to come or (2) the people of Israel confidently expect God to bring those who have died back to life.
2793	28:20	n3s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	Here “Israel” stands for the people. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2794	28:20	pgr8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι	1	Here “bound with this chain” stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “that I am a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2795	28:21	x5d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the words “We,” “we,” and “us” refer to the Jewish leaders in Rome. (See: Acts 28:17 and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2796	28:21	biz7				0	The Jewish leaders respond to Paul.
2797	28:21	y4bx			οὔτε παραγενόμενός τις τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Here “brothers” stands for fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “nor did any of our fellow Jews”
2798	28:22	kw1d			φρονεῖς, περὶ & τῆς αἱρέσεως ταύτης	1	A sect is a smaller group within a larger group. Here it refers to those who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you think about this group to which you belong”
2799	28:22	gy8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γὰρ & γνωστὸν ἡμῖν ἐστι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2800	28:22	j12v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐστιν & πανταχοῦ ἀντιλέγεται	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “many Jews all over the Roman Empire are saying bad things about it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2801	28:23	u7pc				0	Here the word “they” refers to the Jewish leaders in Rome. The words “him,” “his,” and “He” and refer to Paul (Acts 28:17).
2802	28:23	q4iv			ταξάμενοι & αὐτῷ ἡμέραν	1	“had chosen a time for him to speak to them”
2803	28:23	dg5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here “kingdom of God” stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “told them about God’s rule as king” or “told them how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2804	28:23	peu1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν προφητῶν	1	Here “the prophets” refers to what they wrote. Alternate translation: “from what the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2805	28:24	pmd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul was able to convince some of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2806	28:25	t5dq				0	Here the word “they” refers to the Jewish leaders in Rome (Acts 28:17). The word “your” refers to the people to whom Paul had been speaking. In verse 26, Paul begins to quote the prophet Isaiah.
2807	28:25	i5xz				0	As the Jewish leaders were ready to leave, Paul quotes the Old Testament scriptures that were appropriate for this time.
2808	28:25	n7pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰπόντος τοῦ Παύλου ῥῆμα ἓν	1	Here “word” stands for a message or statement. Alternate translation: “after Paul had said one more thing” or “after Paul had made this statement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2809	28:25	b11n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καλῶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐλάλησεν διὰ Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	This sentence contains quotations within quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2810	28:26	qj7q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον & εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	This is the end of the sentence that begins with the words “The Holy Spirit spoke” in verse 25 and that contains quotations within quotations. You can translate one of the inner quotations as an indirect quotation, or you can translate two of the inner quotations as indirect quotations. “The Holy Spirit spoke well through Isaiah the prophet to your forefathers when the Spirit told Isaiah to go tell them that they will hear but will not understand and they will see but they will not perceive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2811	28:26	pax8			ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετ & βλέποντες βλέψετε	1	The words “hear” and “see” are repeated for emphasis. “You will listen carefully … and you will look intently”
2812	28:26	s1ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; & καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2813	28:27	fz42				0	Translate Paul’s quotation of Isaiah as a direct quotation or indirect quotation according to how you translated it in Acts 28:25-26.
2814	28:27	qu6t				0	Paul finishes quoting Isaiah the prophet.
2815	28:27	ts5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου	1	People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if their heart is dull. Here “heart” is a metonym for the mind. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2816	28:27	f5m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν	1	People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if they are unable to hear and are shutting their eyes so that they will see. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2817	28:27	lr99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν	1	Here “heart” stands for the mind. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2818	28:27	q8c2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψωσιν	1	To start obeying God is spoken of as though the person were physically turning toward God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2819	28:27	vb9f			ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1	This does not mean God will only heal them physically. He will also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins.
2820	28:28	c575				0	Paul finishes speaking to the Jewish leaders in Rome.
2821	28:28	b2za		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	God’s message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is sent. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2822	28:28	d18n			αὐτοὶ & ἀκούσονται	1	“some of them will listen.” This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time responded.
2823	28:30	c56e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2824	28:31	wv1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here “kingdom of God” refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “He was preaching about God’s rule as king” or “He was preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])